aboutsummaryrefslogtreecommitdiffstats
path: root/Documentation
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
Diffstat (limited to 'Documentation')
-rw-r--r--Documentation/00-INDEX4
-rw-r--r--Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-regulator55
-rw-r--r--Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-profiling13
-rw-r--r--Documentation/DMA-API.txt2
-rw-r--r--Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl5
-rw-r--r--Documentation/DocBook/mac80211.tmpl12
-rw-r--r--Documentation/DocBook/procfs-guide.tmpl29
-rw-r--r--Documentation/DocBook/procfs_example.c20
-rw-r--r--Documentation/HOWTO4
-rw-r--r--Documentation/RCU/checklist.txt2
-rw-r--r--Documentation/RCU/rcuref.txt16
-rw-r--r--Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt2
-rw-r--r--Documentation/SAK.txt2
-rw-r--r--Documentation/SELinux.txt27
-rw-r--r--Documentation/SubmitChecklist3
-rw-r--r--Documentation/SubmittingDrivers2
-rw-r--r--Documentation/SubmittingPatches4
-rw-r--r--Documentation/blackfin/kgdb.txt155
-rw-r--r--Documentation/block/deadline-iosched.txt14
-rw-r--r--Documentation/cdrom/ide-cd3
-rw-r--r--Documentation/cris/README2
-rw-r--r--Documentation/dontdiff59
-rw-r--r--Documentation/fb/intelfb.txt1
-rw-r--r--Documentation/fb/uvesafb.txt4
-rw-r--r--Documentation/fb/viafb.modes870
-rw-r--r--Documentation/fb/viafb.txt214
-rw-r--r--Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt39
-rw-r--r--Documentation/filesystems/autofs4-mount-control.txt393
-rw-r--r--Documentation/filesystems/ext3.txt3
-rw-r--r--Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt19
-rw-r--r--Documentation/filesystems/fiemap.txt228
-rw-r--r--Documentation/filesystems/nfsroot.txt2
-rw-r--r--Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.txt6
-rw-r--r--Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt74
-rw-r--r--Documentation/filesystems/ramfs-rootfs-initramfs.txt2
-rw-r--r--Documentation/gpio.txt9
-rw-r--r--Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-viapro8
-rw-r--r--Documentation/i2c/dev-interface110
-rw-r--r--Documentation/i2c/smbus-protocol4
-rw-r--r--Documentation/i2c/writing-clients4
-rw-r--r--Documentation/ia64/kvm.txt9
-rw-r--r--Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt4
-rw-r--r--Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt54
-rw-r--r--Documentation/laptops/disk-shock-protection.txt149
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qlge46
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/can.txt44
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/cs89x0.txt4
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt54
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/phonet.txt175
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/regulatory.txt194
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/tproxy.txt85
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/vortex.txt9
-rw-r--r--Documentation/pcmcia/driver-changes.txt6
-rw-r--r--Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt140
-rw-r--r--Documentation/power/regulator/regulator.txt8
-rw-r--r--Documentation/power/s2ram.txt18
-rw-r--r--Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX4
-rw-r--r--Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/83xx-512x-pci.txt40
-rw-r--r--Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/8xxx_gpio.txt40
-rw-r--r--Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/dma.txt13
-rw-r--r--Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/ssi.txt23
-rw-r--r--Documentation/powerpc/ppc_htab.txt118
-rw-r--r--Documentation/powerpc/smp.txt34
-rw-r--r--Documentation/rfkill.txt32
-rw-r--r--Documentation/s390/CommonIO11
-rw-r--r--Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt395
-rw-r--r--Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid6
-rw-r--r--Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt36
-rw-r--r--Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt62
-rw-r--r--Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl65
-rw-r--r--Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/dapm.txt12
-rw-r--r--Documentation/sparc/sbus_drivers.txt309
-rw-r--r--Documentation/spi/pxa2xx34
-rw-r--r--Documentation/timers/00-INDEX10
-rw-r--r--Documentation/timers/hpet.txt (renamed from Documentation/hpet.txt)43
-rw-r--r--Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.bttv1
-rw-r--r--Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx238852
-rw-r--r--Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx888
-rw-r--r--Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx4
-rw-r--r--Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa71348
-rw-r--r--Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.tuner1
-rw-r--r--Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt28
-rw-r--r--Documentation/video4linux/m5602.txt12
-rw-r--r--Documentation/video4linux/soc-camera.txt120
-rw-r--r--Documentation/w1/00-INDEX2
-rw-r--r--Documentation/w1/masters/ds249052
-rw-r--r--Documentation/w1/slaves/00-INDEX4
-rw-r--r--Documentation/w1/slaves/w1_therm41
-rw-r--r--Documentation/w1/w1.generic11
-rw-r--r--Documentation/x86/00-INDEX4
-rw-r--r--Documentation/x86/boot.txt (renamed from Documentation/x86/i386/boot.txt)2
-rw-r--r--Documentation/x86/mtrr.txt (renamed from Documentation/mtrr.txt)4
-rw-r--r--Documentation/x86/pat.txt54
-rw-r--r--Documentation/x86/usb-legacy-support.txt (renamed from Documentation/x86/i386/usb-legacy-support.txt)0
-rw-r--r--Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt4
-rw-r--r--Documentation/x86/zero-page.txt (renamed from Documentation/x86/i386/zero-page.txt)0
96 files changed, 3875 insertions, 1198 deletions
diff --git a/Documentation/00-INDEX b/Documentation/00-INDEX
index 1f3dbdfc9ae3..7286ad090db7 100644
--- a/Documentation/00-INDEX
+++ b/Documentation/00-INDEX
@@ -162,8 +162,6 @@ hayes-esp.txt
162 - info on using the Hayes ESP serial driver. 162 - info on using the Hayes ESP serial driver.
163highuid.txt 163highuid.txt
164 - notes on the change from 16 bit to 32 bit user/group IDs. 164 - notes on the change from 16 bit to 32 bit user/group IDs.
165hpet.txt
166 - High Precision Event Timer Driver for Linux.
167timers/ 165timers/
168 - info on the timer related topics 166 - info on the timer related topics
169hw_random.txt 167hw_random.txt
@@ -254,8 +252,6 @@ mono.txt
254 - how to execute Mono-based .NET binaries with the help of BINFMT_MISC. 252 - how to execute Mono-based .NET binaries with the help of BINFMT_MISC.
255moxa-smartio 253moxa-smartio
256 - file with info on installing/using Moxa multiport serial driver. 254 - file with info on installing/using Moxa multiport serial driver.
257mtrr.txt
258 - how to use PPro Memory Type Range Registers to increase performance.
259mutex-design.txt 255mutex-design.txt
260 - info on the generic mutex subsystem. 256 - info on the generic mutex subsystem.
261namespaces/ 257namespaces/
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-regulator b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-regulator
index 79a4a75b2d2c..3731f6f29bcb 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-regulator
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-regulator
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
1What: /sys/class/regulator/.../state 1What: /sys/class/regulator/.../state
2Date: April 2008 2Date: April 2008
3KernelVersion: 2.6.26 3KernelVersion: 2.6.26
4Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> 4Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
5Description: 5Description:
6 Each regulator directory will contain a field called 6 Each regulator directory will contain a field called
7 state. This holds the regulator output state. 7 state. This holds the regulator output state.
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ Description:
27What: /sys/class/regulator/.../type 27What: /sys/class/regulator/.../type
28Date: April 2008 28Date: April 2008
29KernelVersion: 2.6.26 29KernelVersion: 2.6.26
30Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> 30Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
31Description: 31Description:
32 Each regulator directory will contain a field called 32 Each regulator directory will contain a field called
33 type. This holds the regulator type. 33 type. This holds the regulator type.
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ Description:
51What: /sys/class/regulator/.../microvolts 51What: /sys/class/regulator/.../microvolts
52Date: April 2008 52Date: April 2008
53KernelVersion: 2.6.26 53KernelVersion: 2.6.26
54Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> 54Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
55Description: 55Description:
56 Each regulator directory will contain a field called 56 Each regulator directory will contain a field called
57 microvolts. This holds the regulator output voltage setting 57 microvolts. This holds the regulator output voltage setting
@@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ Description:
65What: /sys/class/regulator/.../microamps 65What: /sys/class/regulator/.../microamps
66Date: April 2008 66Date: April 2008
67KernelVersion: 2.6.26 67KernelVersion: 2.6.26
68Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> 68Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
69Description: 69Description:
70 Each regulator directory will contain a field called 70 Each regulator directory will contain a field called
71 microamps. This holds the regulator output current limit 71 microamps. This holds the regulator output current limit
@@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ Description:
79What: /sys/class/regulator/.../opmode 79What: /sys/class/regulator/.../opmode
80Date: April 2008 80Date: April 2008
81KernelVersion: 2.6.26 81KernelVersion: 2.6.26
82Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> 82Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
83Description: 83Description:
84 Each regulator directory will contain a field called 84 Each regulator directory will contain a field called
85 opmode. This holds the regulator operating mode setting. 85 opmode. This holds the regulator operating mode setting.
@@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ Description:
102What: /sys/class/regulator/.../min_microvolts 102What: /sys/class/regulator/.../min_microvolts
103Date: April 2008 103Date: April 2008
104KernelVersion: 2.6.26 104KernelVersion: 2.6.26
105Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> 105Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
106Description: 106Description:
107 Each regulator directory will contain a field called 107 Each regulator directory will contain a field called
108 min_microvolts. This holds the minimum safe working regulator 108 min_microvolts. This holds the minimum safe working regulator
@@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Description:
116What: /sys/class/regulator/.../max_microvolts 116What: /sys/class/regulator/.../max_microvolts
117Date: April 2008 117Date: April 2008
118KernelVersion: 2.6.26 118KernelVersion: 2.6.26
119Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> 119Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
120Description: 120Description:
121 Each regulator directory will contain a field called 121 Each regulator directory will contain a field called
122 max_microvolts. This holds the maximum safe working regulator 122 max_microvolts. This holds the maximum safe working regulator
@@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ Description:
130What: /sys/class/regulator/.../min_microamps 130What: /sys/class/regulator/.../min_microamps
131Date: April 2008 131Date: April 2008
132KernelVersion: 2.6.26 132KernelVersion: 2.6.26
133Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> 133Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
134Description: 134Description:
135 Each regulator directory will contain a field called 135 Each regulator directory will contain a field called
136 min_microamps. This holds the minimum safe working regulator 136 min_microamps. This holds the minimum safe working regulator
@@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ Description:
145What: /sys/class/regulator/.../max_microamps 145What: /sys/class/regulator/.../max_microamps
146Date: April 2008 146Date: April 2008
147KernelVersion: 2.6.26 147KernelVersion: 2.6.26
148Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> 148Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
149Description: 149Description:
150 Each regulator directory will contain a field called 150 Each regulator directory will contain a field called
151 max_microamps. This holds the maximum safe working regulator 151 max_microamps. This holds the maximum safe working regulator
@@ -157,10 +157,23 @@ Description:
157 platform code. 157 platform code.
158 158
159 159
160What: /sys/class/regulator/.../name
161Date: October 2008
162KernelVersion: 2.6.28
163Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
164Description:
165 Each regulator directory will contain a field called
166 name. This holds a string identifying the regulator for
167 display purposes.
168
169 NOTE: this will be empty if no suitable name is provided
170 by platform or regulator drivers.
171
172
160What: /sys/class/regulator/.../num_users 173What: /sys/class/regulator/.../num_users
161Date: April 2008 174Date: April 2008
162KernelVersion: 2.6.26 175KernelVersion: 2.6.26
163Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> 176Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
164Description: 177Description:
165 Each regulator directory will contain a field called 178 Each regulator directory will contain a field called
166 num_users. This holds the number of consumer devices that 179 num_users. This holds the number of consumer devices that
@@ -170,7 +183,7 @@ Description:
170What: /sys/class/regulator/.../requested_microamps 183What: /sys/class/regulator/.../requested_microamps
171Date: April 2008 184Date: April 2008
172KernelVersion: 2.6.26 185KernelVersion: 2.6.26
173Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> 186Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
174Description: 187Description:
175 Each regulator directory will contain a field called 188 Each regulator directory will contain a field called
176 requested_microamps. This holds the total requested load 189 requested_microamps. This holds the total requested load
@@ -181,7 +194,7 @@ Description:
181What: /sys/class/regulator/.../parent 194What: /sys/class/regulator/.../parent
182Date: April 2008 195Date: April 2008
183KernelVersion: 2.6.26 196KernelVersion: 2.6.26
184Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> 197Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
185Description: 198Description:
186 Some regulator directories will contain a link called parent. 199 Some regulator directories will contain a link called parent.
187 This points to the parent or supply regulator if one exists. 200 This points to the parent or supply regulator if one exists.
@@ -189,7 +202,7 @@ Description:
189What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_mem_microvolts 202What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_mem_microvolts
190Date: May 2008 203Date: May 2008
191KernelVersion: 2.6.26 204KernelVersion: 2.6.26
192Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> 205Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
193Description: 206Description:
194 Each regulator directory will contain a field called 207 Each regulator directory will contain a field called
195 suspend_mem_microvolts. This holds the regulator output 208 suspend_mem_microvolts. This holds the regulator output
@@ -203,7 +216,7 @@ Description:
203What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_disk_microvolts 216What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_disk_microvolts
204Date: May 2008 217Date: May 2008
205KernelVersion: 2.6.26 218KernelVersion: 2.6.26
206Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> 219Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
207Description: 220Description:
208 Each regulator directory will contain a field called 221 Each regulator directory will contain a field called
209 suspend_disk_microvolts. This holds the regulator output 222 suspend_disk_microvolts. This holds the regulator output
@@ -217,7 +230,7 @@ Description:
217What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_standby_microvolts 230What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_standby_microvolts
218Date: May 2008 231Date: May 2008
219KernelVersion: 2.6.26 232KernelVersion: 2.6.26
220Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> 233Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
221Description: 234Description:
222 Each regulator directory will contain a field called 235 Each regulator directory will contain a field called
223 suspend_standby_microvolts. This holds the regulator output 236 suspend_standby_microvolts. This holds the regulator output
@@ -231,7 +244,7 @@ Description:
231What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_mem_mode 244What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_mem_mode
232Date: May 2008 245Date: May 2008
233KernelVersion: 2.6.26 246KernelVersion: 2.6.26
234Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> 247Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
235Description: 248Description:
236 Each regulator directory will contain a field called 249 Each regulator directory will contain a field called
237 suspend_mem_mode. This holds the regulator operating mode 250 suspend_mem_mode. This holds the regulator operating mode
@@ -245,7 +258,7 @@ Description:
245What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_disk_mode 258What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_disk_mode
246Date: May 2008 259Date: May 2008
247KernelVersion: 2.6.26 260KernelVersion: 2.6.26
248Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> 261Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
249Description: 262Description:
250 Each regulator directory will contain a field called 263 Each regulator directory will contain a field called
251 suspend_disk_mode. This holds the regulator operating mode 264 suspend_disk_mode. This holds the regulator operating mode
@@ -258,7 +271,7 @@ Description:
258What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_standby_mode 271What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_standby_mode
259Date: May 2008 272Date: May 2008
260KernelVersion: 2.6.26 273KernelVersion: 2.6.26
261Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> 274Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
262Description: 275Description:
263 Each regulator directory will contain a field called 276 Each regulator directory will contain a field called
264 suspend_standby_mode. This holds the regulator operating mode 277 suspend_standby_mode. This holds the regulator operating mode
@@ -272,7 +285,7 @@ Description:
272What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_mem_state 285What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_mem_state
273Date: May 2008 286Date: May 2008
274KernelVersion: 2.6.26 287KernelVersion: 2.6.26
275Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> 288Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
276Description: 289Description:
277 Each regulator directory will contain a field called 290 Each regulator directory will contain a field called
278 suspend_mem_state. This holds the regulator operating state 291 suspend_mem_state. This holds the regulator operating state
@@ -287,7 +300,7 @@ Description:
287What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_disk_state 300What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_disk_state
288Date: May 2008 301Date: May 2008
289KernelVersion: 2.6.26 302KernelVersion: 2.6.26
290Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> 303Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
291Description: 304Description:
292 Each regulator directory will contain a field called 305 Each regulator directory will contain a field called
293 suspend_disk_state. This holds the regulator operating state 306 suspend_disk_state. This holds the regulator operating state
@@ -302,7 +315,7 @@ Description:
302What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_standby_state 315What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_standby_state
303Date: May 2008 316Date: May 2008
304KernelVersion: 2.6.26 317KernelVersion: 2.6.26
305Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> 318Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
306Description: 319Description:
307 Each regulator directory will contain a field called 320 Each regulator directory will contain a field called
308 suspend_standby_state. This holds the regulator operating 321 suspend_standby_state. This holds the regulator operating
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-profiling b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-profiling
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b02d8b8c173a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-profiling
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
1What: /sys/kernel/profile
2Date: September 2008
3Contact: Dave Hansen <dave@linux.vnet.ibm.com>
4Description:
5 /sys/kernel/profile is the runtime equivalent
6 of the boot-time profile= option.
7
8 You can get the same effect running:
9
10 echo 2 > /sys/kernel/profile
11
12 as you would by issuing profile=2 on the boot
13 command line.
diff --git a/Documentation/DMA-API.txt b/Documentation/DMA-API.txt
index d8b63d164e41..b8e86460046e 100644
--- a/Documentation/DMA-API.txt
+++ b/Documentation/DMA-API.txt
@@ -337,7 +337,7 @@ With scatterlists, you use the resulting mapping like this:
337 int i, count = dma_map_sg(dev, sglist, nents, direction); 337 int i, count = dma_map_sg(dev, sglist, nents, direction);
338 struct scatterlist *sg; 338 struct scatterlist *sg;
339 339
340 for (i = 0, sg = sglist; i < count; i++, sg++) { 340 for_each_sg(sglist, sg, count, i) {
341 hw_address[i] = sg_dma_address(sg); 341 hw_address[i] = sg_dma_address(sg);
342 hw_len[i] = sg_dma_len(sg); 342 hw_len[i] = sg_dma_len(sg);
343 } 343 }
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl
index b7b1482f6e04..9d0058e788e5 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl
@@ -283,6 +283,7 @@ X!Earch/x86/kernel/mca_32.c
283 <chapter id="security"> 283 <chapter id="security">
284 <title>Security Framework</title> 284 <title>Security Framework</title>
285!Isecurity/security.c 285!Isecurity/security.c
286!Esecurity/inode.c
286 </chapter> 287 </chapter>
287 288
288 <chapter id="audit"> 289 <chapter id="audit">
@@ -364,6 +365,10 @@ X!Edrivers/pnp/system.c
364!Eblock/blk-barrier.c 365!Eblock/blk-barrier.c
365!Eblock/blk-tag.c 366!Eblock/blk-tag.c
366!Iblock/blk-tag.c 367!Iblock/blk-tag.c
368!Eblock/blk-integrity.c
369!Iblock/blktrace.c
370!Iblock/genhd.c
371!Eblock/genhd.c
367 </chapter> 372 </chapter>
368 373
369 <chapter id="chrdev"> 374 <chapter id="chrdev">
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/mac80211.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/mac80211.tmpl
index b651e0a4b1c0..77c3c202991b 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/mac80211.tmpl
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/mac80211.tmpl
@@ -145,7 +145,6 @@ usage should require reading the full document.
145 this though and the recommendation to allow only a single 145 this though and the recommendation to allow only a single
146 interface in STA mode at first! 146 interface in STA mode at first!
147 </para> 147 </para>
148!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_if_types
149!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_if_init_conf 148!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_if_init_conf
150!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_if_conf 149!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_if_conf
151 </chapter> 150 </chapter>
@@ -177,8 +176,7 @@ usage should require reading the full document.
177 <title>functions/definitions</title> 176 <title>functions/definitions</title>
178!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rx_status 177!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rx_status
179!Finclude/net/mac80211.h mac80211_rx_flags 178!Finclude/net/mac80211.h mac80211_rx_flags
180!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_control 179!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_info
181!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_status_flags
182!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rx 180!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rx
183!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rx_irqsafe 181!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rx_irqsafe
184!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_status 182!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_status
@@ -189,12 +187,11 @@ usage should require reading the full document.
189!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_ctstoself_duration 187!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_ctstoself_duration
190!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_generic_frame_duration 188!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_generic_frame_duration
191!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_hdrlen_from_skb 189!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_hdrlen_from_skb
192!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_hdrlen 190!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_hdrlen
193!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_wake_queue 191!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_wake_queue
194!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_stop_queue 192!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_stop_queue
195!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_start_queues
196!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_stop_queues
197!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_wake_queues 193!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_wake_queues
194!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_stop_queues
198 </sect1> 195 </sect1>
199 </chapter> 196 </chapter>
200 197
@@ -230,8 +227,7 @@ usage should require reading the full document.
230 <title>Multiple queues and QoS support</title> 227 <title>Multiple queues and QoS support</title>
231 <para>TBD</para> 228 <para>TBD</para>
232!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_queue_params 229!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_queue_params
233!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_queue_stats_data 230!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_queue_stats
234!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_queue
235 </chapter> 231 </chapter>
236 232
237 <chapter id="AP"> 233 <chapter id="AP">
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/procfs-guide.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/procfs-guide.tmpl
index 8a5dc6e021ff..9eba4b7af73d 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/procfs-guide.tmpl
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/procfs-guide.tmpl
@@ -14,17 +14,20 @@
14 <othername>(J.A.K.)</othername> 14 <othername>(J.A.K.)</othername>
15 <surname>Mouw</surname> 15 <surname>Mouw</surname>
16 <affiliation> 16 <affiliation>
17 <orgname>Delft University of Technology</orgname>
18 <orgdiv>Faculty of Information Technology and Systems</orgdiv>
19 <address> 17 <address>
20 <email>J.A.K.Mouw@its.tudelft.nl</email> 18 <email>mouw@nl.linux.org</email>
21 <pob>PO BOX 5031</pob>
22 <postcode>2600 GA</postcode>
23 <city>Delft</city>
24 <country>The Netherlands</country>
25 </address> 19 </address>
26 </affiliation> 20 </affiliation>
27 </author> 21 </author>
22 <othercredit>
23 <contrib>
24 This software and documentation were written while working on the
25 LART computing board
26 (<ulink url="http://www.lartmaker.nl/">http://www.lartmaker.nl/</ulink>),
27 which was sponsored by the Delt University of Technology projects
28 Mobile Multi-media Communications and Ubiquitous Communications.
29 </contrib>
30 </othercredit>
28 </authorgroup> 31 </authorgroup>
29 32
30 <revhistory> 33 <revhistory>
@@ -109,18 +112,6 @@
109 </para> 112 </para>
110 113
111 <para> 114 <para>
112 This documentation was written while working on the LART
113 computing board (<ulink
114 url="http://www.lart.tudelft.nl/">http://www.lart.tudelft.nl/</ulink>),
115 which is sponsored by the Mobile Multi-media Communications
116 (<ulink
117 url="http://www.mmc.tudelft.nl/">http://www.mmc.tudelft.nl/</ulink>)
118 and Ubiquitous Communications (<ulink
119 url="http://www.ubicom.tudelft.nl/">http://www.ubicom.tudelft.nl/</ulink>)
120 projects.
121 </para>
122
123 <para>
124 Erik 115 Erik
125 </para> 116 </para>
126 </preface> 117 </preface>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/procfs_example.c b/Documentation/DocBook/procfs_example.c
index 2f3de0fb8365..8c6396e4bf31 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/procfs_example.c
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/procfs_example.c
@@ -1,28 +1,16 @@
1/* 1/*
2 * procfs_example.c: an example proc interface 2 * procfs_example.c: an example proc interface
3 * 3 *
4 * Copyright (C) 2001, Erik Mouw (J.A.K.Mouw@its.tudelft.nl) 4 * Copyright (C) 2001, Erik Mouw (mouw@nl.linux.org)
5 * 5 *
6 * This file accompanies the procfs-guide in the Linux kernel 6 * This file accompanies the procfs-guide in the Linux kernel
7 * source. Its main use is to demonstrate the concepts and 7 * source. Its main use is to demonstrate the concepts and
8 * functions described in the guide. 8 * functions described in the guide.
9 * 9 *
10 * This software has been developed while working on the LART 10 * This software has been developed while working on the LART
11 * computing board (http://www.lart.tudelft.nl/), which is 11 * computing board (http://www.lartmaker.nl), which was sponsored
12 * sponsored by the Mobile Multi-media Communications 12 * by the Delt University of Technology projects Mobile Multi-media
13 * (http://www.mmc.tudelft.nl/) and Ubiquitous Communications 13 * Communications and Ubiquitous Communications.
14 * (http://www.ubicom.tudelft.nl/) projects.
15 *
16 * The author can be reached at:
17 *
18 * Erik Mouw
19 * Information and Communication Theory Group
20 * Faculty of Information Technology and Systems
21 * Delft University of Technology
22 * P.O. Box 5031
23 * 2600 GA Delft
24 * The Netherlands
25 *
26 * 14 *
27 * This program is free software; you can redistribute 15 * This program is free software; you can redistribute
28 * it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General 16 * it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General
diff --git a/Documentation/HOWTO b/Documentation/HOWTO
index 48a3955f05fc..8495fc970391 100644
--- a/Documentation/HOWTO
+++ b/Documentation/HOWTO
@@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ required reading:
112 112
113 Other excellent descriptions of how to create patches properly are: 113 Other excellent descriptions of how to create patches properly are:
114 "The Perfect Patch" 114 "The Perfect Patch"
115 http://www.zip.com.au/~akpm/linux/patches/stuff/tpp.txt 115 http://userweb.kernel.org/~akpm/stuff/tpp.txt
116 "Linux kernel patch submission format" 116 "Linux kernel patch submission format"
117 http://linux.yyz.us/patch-format.html 117 http://linux.yyz.us/patch-format.html
118 118
@@ -620,7 +620,7 @@ all time. It should describe the patch completely, containing:
620For more details on what this should all look like, please see the 620For more details on what this should all look like, please see the
621ChangeLog section of the document: 621ChangeLog section of the document:
622 "The Perfect Patch" 622 "The Perfect Patch"
623 http://www.zip.com.au/~akpm/linux/patches/stuff/tpp.txt 623 http://userweb.kernel.org/~akpm/stuff/tpp.txt
624 624
625 625
626 626
diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/checklist.txt b/Documentation/RCU/checklist.txt
index cf5562cbe356..6e253407b3dc 100644
--- a/Documentation/RCU/checklist.txt
+++ b/Documentation/RCU/checklist.txt
@@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ over a rather long period of time, but improvements are always welcome!
210 number of updates per grace period. 210 number of updates per grace period.
211 211
2129. All RCU list-traversal primitives, which include 2129. All RCU list-traversal primitives, which include
213 rcu_dereference(), list_for_each_rcu(), list_for_each_entry_rcu(), 213 rcu_dereference(), list_for_each_entry_rcu(),
214 list_for_each_continue_rcu(), and list_for_each_safe_rcu(), 214 list_for_each_continue_rcu(), and list_for_each_safe_rcu(),
215 must be either within an RCU read-side critical section or 215 must be either within an RCU read-side critical section or
216 must be protected by appropriate update-side locks. RCU 216 must be protected by appropriate update-side locks. RCU
diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/rcuref.txt b/Documentation/RCU/rcuref.txt
index 451de2ad8329..4202ad093130 100644
--- a/Documentation/RCU/rcuref.txt
+++ b/Documentation/RCU/rcuref.txt
@@ -29,9 +29,9 @@ release_referenced() delete()
29 } 29 }
30 30
31If this list/array is made lock free using RCU as in changing the 31If this list/array is made lock free using RCU as in changing the
32write_lock() in add() and delete() to spin_lock and changing read_lock 32write_lock() in add() and delete() to spin_lock() and changing read_lock()
33in search_and_reference to rcu_read_lock(), the atomic_get in 33in search_and_reference() to rcu_read_lock(), the atomic_inc() in
34search_and_reference could potentially hold reference to an element which 34search_and_reference() could potentially hold reference to an element which
35has already been deleted from the list/array. Use atomic_inc_not_zero() 35has already been deleted from the list/array. Use atomic_inc_not_zero()
36in this scenario as follows: 36in this scenario as follows:
37 37
@@ -40,20 +40,20 @@ add() search_and_reference()
40{ { 40{ {
41 alloc_object rcu_read_lock(); 41 alloc_object rcu_read_lock();
42 ... search_for_element 42 ... search_for_element
43 atomic_set(&el->rc, 1); if (atomic_inc_not_zero(&el->rc)) { 43 atomic_set(&el->rc, 1); if (!atomic_inc_not_zero(&el->rc)) {
44 write_lock(&list_lock); rcu_read_unlock(); 44 spin_lock(&list_lock); rcu_read_unlock();
45 return FAIL; 45 return FAIL;
46 add_element } 46 add_element }
47 ... ... 47 ... ...
48 write_unlock(&list_lock); rcu_read_unlock(); 48 spin_unlock(&list_lock); rcu_read_unlock();
49} } 49} }
503. 4. 503. 4.
51release_referenced() delete() 51release_referenced() delete()
52{ { 52{ {
53 ... write_lock(&list_lock); 53 ... spin_lock(&list_lock);
54 if (atomic_dec_and_test(&el->rc)) ... 54 if (atomic_dec_and_test(&el->rc)) ...
55 call_rcu(&el->head, el_free); delete_element 55 call_rcu(&el->head, el_free); delete_element
56 ... write_unlock(&list_lock); 56 ... spin_unlock(&list_lock);
57} ... 57} ...
58 if (atomic_dec_and_test(&el->rc)) 58 if (atomic_dec_and_test(&el->rc))
59 call_rcu(&el->head, el_free); 59 call_rcu(&el->head, el_free);
diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt b/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt
index e04d643a9f57..96170824a717 100644
--- a/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt
+++ b/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt
@@ -786,8 +786,6 @@ RCU pointer/list traversal:
786 list_for_each_entry_rcu 786 list_for_each_entry_rcu
787 hlist_for_each_entry_rcu 787 hlist_for_each_entry_rcu
788 788
789 list_for_each_rcu (to be deprecated in favor of
790 list_for_each_entry_rcu)
791 list_for_each_continue_rcu (to be deprecated in favor of new 789 list_for_each_continue_rcu (to be deprecated in favor of new
792 list_for_each_entry_continue_rcu) 790 list_for_each_entry_continue_rcu)
793 791
diff --git a/Documentation/SAK.txt b/Documentation/SAK.txt
index b9019ca872ea..74be14679ed8 100644
--- a/Documentation/SAK.txt
+++ b/Documentation/SAK.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
1Linux 2.4.2 Secure Attention Key (SAK) handling 1Linux 2.4.2 Secure Attention Key (SAK) handling
218 March 2001, Andrew Morton <akpm@osdl.org> 218 March 2001, Andrew Morton
3 3
4An operating system's Secure Attention Key is a security tool which is 4An operating system's Secure Attention Key is a security tool which is
5provided as protection against trojan password capturing programs. It 5provided as protection against trojan password capturing programs. It
diff --git a/Documentation/SELinux.txt b/Documentation/SELinux.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..07eae00f3314
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/SELinux.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
1If you want to use SELinux, chances are you will want
2to use the distro-provided policies, or install the
3latest reference policy release from
4 http://oss.tresys.com/projects/refpolicy
5
6However, if you want to install a dummy policy for
7testing, you can do using 'mdp' provided under
8scripts/selinux. Note that this requires the selinux
9userspace to be installed - in particular you will
10need checkpolicy to compile a kernel, and setfiles and
11fixfiles to label the filesystem.
12
13 1. Compile the kernel with selinux enabled.
14 2. Type 'make' to compile mdp.
15 3. Make sure that you are not running with
16 SELinux enabled and a real policy. If
17 you are, reboot with selinux disabled
18 before continuing.
19 4. Run install_policy.sh:
20 cd scripts/selinux
21 sh install_policy.sh
22
23Step 4 will create a new dummy policy valid for your
24kernel, with a single selinux user, role, and type.
25It will compile the policy, will set your SELINUXTYPE to
26dummy in /etc/selinux/config, install the compiled policy
27as 'dummy', and relabel your filesystem.
diff --git a/Documentation/SubmitChecklist b/Documentation/SubmitChecklist
index 21f0795af20f..ac5e0b2f1097 100644
--- a/Documentation/SubmitChecklist
+++ b/Documentation/SubmitChecklist
@@ -85,3 +85,6 @@ kernel patches.
8523: Tested after it has been merged into the -mm patchset to make sure 8523: Tested after it has been merged into the -mm patchset to make sure
86 that it still works with all of the other queued patches and various 86 that it still works with all of the other queued patches and various
87 changes in the VM, VFS, and other subsystems. 87 changes in the VM, VFS, and other subsystems.
88
8924: All memory barriers {e.g., barrier(), rmb(), wmb()} need a comment in the
90 source code that explains the logic of what they are doing and why.
diff --git a/Documentation/SubmittingDrivers b/Documentation/SubmittingDrivers
index 24f2eb40cae5..99e72a81fa2f 100644
--- a/Documentation/SubmittingDrivers
+++ b/Documentation/SubmittingDrivers
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ Linux 2.4:
41Linux 2.6: 41Linux 2.6:
42 The same rules apply as 2.4 except that you should follow linux-kernel 42 The same rules apply as 2.4 except that you should follow linux-kernel
43 to track changes in API's. The final contact point for Linux 2.6 43 to track changes in API's. The final contact point for Linux 2.6
44 submissions is Andrew Morton <akpm@osdl.org>. 44 submissions is Andrew Morton.
45 45
46What Criteria Determine Acceptance 46What Criteria Determine Acceptance
47---------------------------------- 47----------------------------------
diff --git a/Documentation/SubmittingPatches b/Documentation/SubmittingPatches
index 98aa8b187395..f309d3c6221c 100644
--- a/Documentation/SubmittingPatches
+++ b/Documentation/SubmittingPatches
@@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ Quilt:
77http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/quilt 77http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/quilt
78 78
79Andrew Morton's patch scripts: 79Andrew Morton's patch scripts:
80http://www.zip.com.au/~akpm/linux/patches/ 80http://userweb.kernel.org/~akpm/stuff/patch-scripts.tar.gz
81Instead of these scripts, quilt is the recommended patch management 81Instead of these scripts, quilt is the recommended patch management
82tool (see above). 82tool (see above).
83 83
@@ -653,7 +653,7 @@ SECTION 3 - REFERENCES
653---------------------- 653----------------------
654 654
655Andrew Morton, "The perfect patch" (tpp). 655Andrew Morton, "The perfect patch" (tpp).
656 <http://www.zip.com.au/~akpm/linux/patches/stuff/tpp.txt> 656 <http://userweb.kernel.org/~akpm/stuff/tpp.txt>
657 657
658Jeff Garzik, "Linux kernel patch submission format". 658Jeff Garzik, "Linux kernel patch submission format".
659 <http://linux.yyz.us/patch-format.html> 659 <http://linux.yyz.us/patch-format.html>
diff --git a/Documentation/blackfin/kgdb.txt b/Documentation/blackfin/kgdb.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 84f6a484ae9a..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/blackfin/kgdb.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,155 +0,0 @@
1 A Simple Guide to Configure KGDB
2
3 Sonic Zhang <sonic.zhang@analog.com>
4 Aug. 24th 2006
5
6
7This KGDB patch enables the kernel developer to do source level debugging on
8the kernel for the Blackfin architecture. The debugging works over either the
9ethernet interface or one of the uarts. Both software breakpoints and
10hardware breakpoints are supported in this version.
11http://docs.blackfin.uclinux.org/doku.php?id=kgdb
12
13
142 known issues:
151. This bug:
16 http://blackfin.uclinux.org/tracker/index.php?func=detail&aid=544&group_id=18&atid=145
17 The GDB client for Blackfin uClinux causes incorrect values of local
18 variables to be displayed when the user breaks the running of kernel in GDB.
192. Because of a hardware bug in Blackfin 533 v1.0.3:
20 05000067 - Watchpoints (Hardware Breakpoints) are not supported
21 Hardware breakpoints cannot be set properly.
22
23
24Debug over Ethernet:
25
261. Compile and install the cross platform version of gdb for blackfin, which
27 can be found at $(BINROOT)/bfin-elf-gdb.
28
292. Apply this patch to the 2.6.x kernel. Select the menuconfig option under
30 "Kernel hacking" -> "Kernel debugging" -> "KGDB: kernel debug with remote gdb".
31 With this selected, option "Full Symbolic/Source Debugging support" and
32 "Compile the kernel with frame pointers" are also selected.
33
343. Select option "KGDB: connect over (Ethernet)". Add "kgdboe=@target-IP/,@host-IP/" to
35 the option "Compiled-in Kernel Boot Parameter" under "Kernel hacking".
36
374. Connect minicom to the serial port and boot the kernel image.
38
395. Configure the IP "/> ifconfig eth0 target-IP"
40
416. Start GDB client "bfin-elf-gdb vmlinux".
42
437. Connect to the target "(gdb) target remote udp:target-IP:6443".
44
458. Set software breakpoint "(gdb) break sys_open".
46
479. Continue "(gdb) c".
48
4910. Run ls in the target console "/> ls".
50
5111. Breakpoint hits. "Breakpoint 1: sys_open(..."
52
5312. Display local variables and function paramters.
54 (*) This operation gives wrong results, see known issue 1.
55
5613. Single stepping "(gdb) si".
57
5814. Remove breakpoint 1. "(gdb) del 1"
59
6015. Set hardware breakpoint "(gdb) hbreak sys_open".
61
6216. Continue "(gdb) c".
63
6417. Run ls in the target console "/> ls".
65
6618. Hardware breakpoint hits. "Breakpoint 1: sys_open(...".
67 (*) This hardware breakpoint will not be hit, see known issue 2.
68
6919. Continue "(gdb) c".
70
7120. Interrupt the target in GDB "Ctrl+C".
72
7321. Detach from the target "(gdb) detach".
74
7522. Exit GDB "(gdb) quit".
76
77
78Debug over the UART:
79
801. Compile and install the cross platform version of gdb for blackfin, which
81 can be found at $(BINROOT)/bfin-elf-gdb.
82
832. Apply this patch to the 2.6.x kernel. Select the menuconfig option under
84 "Kernel hacking" -> "Kernel debugging" -> "KGDB: kernel debug with remote gdb".
85 With this selected, option "Full Symbolic/Source Debugging support" and
86 "Compile the kernel with frame pointers" are also selected.
87
883. Select option "KGDB: connect over (UART)". Set "KGDB: UART port number" to be
89 a different one from the console. Don't forget to change the mode of
90 blackfin serial driver to PIO. Otherwise kgdb works incorrectly on UART.
91
924. If you want connect to kgdb when the kernel boots, enable
93 "KGDB: Wait for gdb connection early"
94
955. Compile kernel.
96
976. Connect minicom to the serial port of the console and boot the kernel image.
98
997. Start GDB client "bfin-elf-gdb vmlinux".
100
1018. Set the baud rate in GDB "(gdb) set remotebaud 57600".
102
1039. Connect to the target on the second serial port "(gdb) target remote /dev/ttyS1".
104
10510. Set software breakpoint "(gdb) break sys_open".
106
10711. Continue "(gdb) c".
108
10912. Run ls in the target console "/> ls".
110
11113. A breakpoint is hit. "Breakpoint 1: sys_open(..."
112
11314. All other operations are the same as that in KGDB over Ethernet.
114
115
116Debug over the same UART as console:
117
1181. Compile and install the cross platform version of gdb for blackfin, which
119 can be found at $(BINROOT)/bfin-elf-gdb.
120
1212. Apply this patch to the 2.6.x kernel. Select the menuconfig option under
122 "Kernel hacking" -> "Kernel debugging" -> "KGDB: kernel debug with remote gdb".
123 With this selected, option "Full Symbolic/Source Debugging support" and
124 "Compile the kernel with frame pointers" are also selected.
125
1263. Select option "KGDB: connect over UART". Set "KGDB: UART port number" to console.
127 Don't forget to change the mode of blackfin serial driver to PIO.
128 Otherwise kgdb works incorrectly on UART.
129
1304. If you want connect to kgdb when the kernel boots, enable
131 "KGDB: Wait for gdb connection early"
132
1335. Connect minicom to the serial port and boot the kernel image.
134
1356. (Optional) Ask target to wait for gdb connection by entering Ctrl+A. In minicom, you should enter Ctrl+A+A.
136
1377. Start GDB client "bfin-elf-gdb vmlinux".
138
1398. Set the baud rate in GDB "(gdb) set remotebaud 57600".
140
1419. Connect to the target "(gdb) target remote /dev/ttyS0".
142
14310. Set software breakpoint "(gdb) break sys_open".
144
14511. Continue "(gdb) c". Then enter Ctrl+C twice to stop GDB connection.
146
14712. Run ls in the target console "/> ls". Dummy string can be seen on the console.
148
14913. Then connect the gdb to target again. "(gdb) target remote /dev/ttyS0".
150 Now you will find a breakpoint is hit. "Breakpoint 1: sys_open(..."
151
15214. All other operations are the same as that in KGDB over Ethernet. The only
153 difference is that after continue command in GDB, please stop GDB
154 connection by 2 "Ctrl+C"s and connect again after breakpoints are hit or
155 Ctrl+A is entered.
diff --git a/Documentation/block/deadline-iosched.txt b/Documentation/block/deadline-iosched.txt
index c23cab13c3d1..72576769e0f4 100644
--- a/Documentation/block/deadline-iosched.txt
+++ b/Documentation/block/deadline-iosched.txt
@@ -30,12 +30,18 @@ write_expire (in ms)
30Similar to read_expire mentioned above, but for writes. 30Similar to read_expire mentioned above, but for writes.
31 31
32 32
33fifo_batch 33fifo_batch (number of requests)
34---------- 34----------
35 35
36When a read request expires its deadline, we must move some requests from 36Requests are grouped into ``batches'' of a particular data direction (read or
37the sorted io scheduler list to the block device dispatch queue. fifo_batch 37write) which are serviced in increasing sector order. To limit extra seeking,
38controls how many requests we move. 38deadline expiries are only checked between batches. fifo_batch controls the
39maximum number of requests per batch.
40
41This parameter tunes the balance between per-request latency and aggregate
42throughput. When low latency is the primary concern, smaller is better (where
43a value of 1 yields first-come first-served behaviour). Increasing fifo_batch
44generally improves throughput, at the cost of latency variation.
39 45
40 46
41writes_starved (number of dispatches) 47writes_starved (number of dispatches)
diff --git a/Documentation/cdrom/ide-cd b/Documentation/cdrom/ide-cd
index 91c0dcc6fa5c..2c558cd6c1ef 100644
--- a/Documentation/cdrom/ide-cd
+++ b/Documentation/cdrom/ide-cd
@@ -145,8 +145,7 @@ useful for reading photocds.
145 145
146To play an audio CD, you should first unmount and remove any data 146To play an audio CD, you should first unmount and remove any data
147CDROM. Any of the CDROM player programs should then work (workman, 147CDROM. Any of the CDROM player programs should then work (workman,
148workbone, cdplayer, etc.). Lacking anything else, you could use the 148workbone, cdplayer, etc.).
149cdtester program in Documentation/cdrom/sbpcd.
150 149
151On a few drives, you can read digital audio directly using a program 150On a few drives, you can read digital audio directly using a program
152such as cdda2wav. The only types of drive which I've heard support 151such as cdda2wav. The only types of drive which I've heard support
diff --git a/Documentation/cris/README b/Documentation/cris/README
index 795a1dabe6c7..d9b086869a60 100644
--- a/Documentation/cris/README
+++ b/Documentation/cris/README
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ operating system.
27The ETRAX 100LX chip 27The ETRAX 100LX chip
28-------------------- 28--------------------
29 29
30For reference, plase see the press-release: 30For reference, please see the press-release:
31 31
32http://www.axis.com/news/us/001101_etrax.htm 32http://www.axis.com/news/us/001101_etrax.htm
33 33
diff --git a/Documentation/dontdiff b/Documentation/dontdiff
index 27809357da58..1e89a51ea49b 100644
--- a/Documentation/dontdiff
+++ b/Documentation/dontdiff
@@ -2,11 +2,13 @@
2*.aux 2*.aux
3*.bin 3*.bin
4*.cpio 4*.cpio
5*.css 5*.csp
6*.dsp
6*.dvi 7*.dvi
8*.elf
7*.eps 9*.eps
8*.fw.gen.S
9*.fw 10*.fw
11*.gen.S
10*.gif 12*.gif
11*.grep 13*.grep
12*.grp 14*.grp
@@ -30,6 +32,7 @@
30*.s 32*.s
31*.sgml 33*.sgml
32*.so 34*.so
35*.so.dbg
33*.symtypes 36*.symtypes
34*.tab.c 37*.tab.c
35*.tab.h 38*.tab.h
@@ -38,24 +41,17 @@
38*.xml 41*.xml
39*_MODULES 42*_MODULES
40*_vga16.c 43*_vga16.c
41*cscope*
42*~ 44*~
43*.9 45*.9
44*.9.gz 46*.9.gz
45.* 47.*
46.cscope
47.gitignore
48.mailmap
49.mm 48.mm
5053c700_d.h 4953c700_d.h
5153c8xx_d.h*
52COPYING
53CREDITS
54CVS 50CVS
55ChangeSet 51ChangeSet
56Image 52Image
57Kerntypes 53Kerntypes
58MODS.txt 54Module.markers
59Module.symvers 55Module.symvers
60PENDING 56PENDING
61SCCS 57SCCS
@@ -73,7 +69,9 @@ autoconf.h*
73bbootsect 69bbootsect
74bin2c 70bin2c
75binkernel.spec 71binkernel.spec
72binoffset
76bootsect 73bootsect
74bounds.h
77bsetup 75bsetup
78btfixupprep 76btfixupprep
79build 77build
@@ -89,39 +87,36 @@ config_data.h*
89config_data.gz* 87config_data.gz*
90conmakehash 88conmakehash
91consolemap_deftbl.c* 89consolemap_deftbl.c*
90cpustr.h
92crc32table.h* 91crc32table.h*
93cscope.* 92cscope.*
94defkeymap.c* 93defkeymap.c
95devlist.h* 94devlist.h*
96docproc 95docproc
97dummy_sym.c*
98elf2ecoff 96elf2ecoff
99elfconfig.h* 97elfconfig.h*
100filelist
101fixdep 98fixdep
102fore200e_mkfirm 99fore200e_mkfirm
103fore200e_pca_fw.c* 100fore200e_pca_fw.c*
104gconf 101gconf
105gen-devlist 102gen-devlist
106gen-kdb_cmds.c*
107gen_crc32table 103gen_crc32table
108gen_init_cpio 104gen_init_cpio
109genksyms 105genksyms
110gentbl
111*_gray256.c 106*_gray256.c
107ihex2fw
112ikconfig.h* 108ikconfig.h*
113initramfs_data.cpio 109initramfs_data.cpio
114initramfs_data.cpio.gz 110initramfs_data.cpio.gz
115initramfs_list 111initramfs_list
116kallsyms 112kallsyms
117kconfig 113kconfig
118kconfig.tk 114keywords.c
119keywords.c*
120ksym.c* 115ksym.c*
121ksym.h* 116ksym.h*
122kxgettext 117kxgettext
123lkc_defs.h 118lkc_defs.h
124lex.c* 119lex.c
125lex.*.c 120lex.*.c
126logo_*.c 121logo_*.c
127logo_*_clut224.c 122logo_*_clut224.c
@@ -130,7 +125,6 @@ lxdialog
130mach-types 125mach-types
131mach-types.h 126mach-types.h
132machtypes.h 127machtypes.h
133make_times_h
134map 128map
135maui_boot.h 129maui_boot.h
136mconf 130mconf
@@ -138,6 +132,7 @@ miboot*
138mk_elfconfig 132mk_elfconfig
139mkboot 133mkboot
140mkbugboot 134mkbugboot
135mkcpustr
141mkdep 136mkdep
142mkprep 137mkprep
143mktables 138mktables
@@ -145,11 +140,12 @@ mktree
145modpost 140modpost
146modules.order 141modules.order
147modversions.h* 142modversions.h*
143ncscope.*
148offset.h 144offset.h
149offsets.h 145offsets.h
150oui.c* 146oui.c*
151parse.c* 147parse.c
152parse.h* 148parse.h
153patches* 149patches*
154pca200e.bin 150pca200e.bin
155pca200e_ecd.bin2 151pca200e_ecd.bin2
@@ -157,7 +153,7 @@ piggy.gz
157piggyback 153piggyback
158pnmtologo 154pnmtologo
159ppc_defs.h* 155ppc_defs.h*
160promcon_tbl.c* 156promcon_tbl.c
161pss_boot.h 157pss_boot.h
162qconf 158qconf
163raid6altivec*.c 159raid6altivec*.c
@@ -168,27 +164,38 @@ series
168setup 164setup
169setup.bin 165setup.bin
170setup.elf 166setup.elf
171sim710_d.h*
172sImage 167sImage
173sm_tbl* 168sm_tbl*
174split-include 169split-include
170syscalltab.h
175tags 171tags
176tftpboot.img 172tftpboot.img
177timeconst.h 173timeconst.h
178times.h* 174times.h*
179tkparse
180trix_boot.h 175trix_boot.h
181utsrelease.h* 176utsrelease.h*
177vdso-syms.lds
182vdso.lds 178vdso.lds
179vdso32-int80-syms.lds
180vdso32-syms.lds
181vdso32-syscall-syms.lds
182vdso32-sysenter-syms.lds
183vdso32.lds
184vdso32.so.dbg
185vdso64.lds
186vdso64.so.dbg
183version.h* 187version.h*
184vmlinux 188vmlinux
185vmlinux-* 189vmlinux-*
186vmlinux.aout 190vmlinux.aout
187vmlinux*.lds* 191vmlinux.lds
188vmlinux*.scr
189vsyscall.lds 192vsyscall.lds
193vsyscall_32.lds
190wanxlfw.inc 194wanxlfw.inc
191uImage 195uImage
192unifdef 196unifdef
197wakeup.bin
198wakeup.elf
199wakeup.lds
193zImage* 200zImage*
194zconf.hash.c 201zconf.hash.c
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/intelfb.txt b/Documentation/fb/intelfb.txt
index 27a3160650a4..dd9e944ea628 100644
--- a/Documentation/fb/intelfb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fb/intelfb.txt
@@ -14,6 +14,7 @@ graphics devices. These would include:
14 Intel 915GM 14 Intel 915GM
15 Intel 945G 15 Intel 945G
16 Intel 945GM 16 Intel 945GM
17 Intel 945GME
17 Intel 965G 18 Intel 965G
18 Intel 965GM 19 Intel 965GM
19 20
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/uvesafb.txt b/Documentation/fb/uvesafb.txt
index bcfc233a0080..7ac3c4078ff9 100644
--- a/Documentation/fb/uvesafb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fb/uvesafb.txt
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ are either given on the kernel command line or as module parameters, e.g.:
52 52
53 video=uvesafb:1024x768-32,mtrr:3,ywrap (compiled into the kernel) 53 video=uvesafb:1024x768-32,mtrr:3,ywrap (compiled into the kernel)
54 54
55 # modprobe uvesafb mode=1024x768-32 mtrr=3 scroll=ywrap (module) 55 # modprobe uvesafb mode_option=1024x768-32 mtrr=3 scroll=ywrap (module)
56 56
57Accepted options: 57Accepted options:
58 58
@@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ vtotal:n
105<mode> The mode you want to set, in the standard modedb format. Refer to 105<mode> The mode you want to set, in the standard modedb format. Refer to
106 modedb.txt for a detailed description. When uvesafb is compiled as 106 modedb.txt for a detailed description. When uvesafb is compiled as
107 a module, the mode string should be provided as a value of the 107 a module, the mode string should be provided as a value of the
108 'mode' option. 108 'mode_option' option.
109 109
110vbemode:x 110vbemode:x
111 Force the use of VBE mode x. The mode will only be set if it's 111 Force the use of VBE mode x. The mode will only be set if it's
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/viafb.modes b/Documentation/fb/viafb.modes
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..02e5b487f00e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/fb/viafb.modes
@@ -0,0 +1,870 @@
1#
2#
3# These data are based on the CRTC parameters in
4#
5# VIA Integration Graphics Chip
6# (C) 2004 VIA Technologies Inc.
7#
8
9#
10# 640x480, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (25.175 MHz dotclock)
11#
12# Horizontal Vertical
13# Resolution 640 480
14# Scan Frequency 31.469 kHz 59.94 Hz
15# Sync Width 3.813 us 0.064 ms
16# 12 chars 2 lines
17# Front Porch 0.636 us 0.318 ms
18# 2 chars 10 lines
19# Back Porch 1.907 us 1.048 ms
20# 6 chars 33 lines
21# Active Time 25.422 us 15.253 ms
22# 80 chars 480 lines
23# Blank Time 6.356 us 1.430 ms
24# 20 chars 45 lines
25# Polarity negative negative
26#
27
28mode "640x480-60"
29# D: 25.175 MHz, H: 31.469 kHz, V: 59.94 Hz
30 geometry 640 480 640 480 32
31 timings 39722 48 16 33 10 96 2 endmode mode "480x640-60"
32# D: 24.823 MHz, H: 39.780 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
33 geometry 480 640 480 640 32 timings 39722 72 24 19 1 48 3 endmode
34#
35# 640x480, 75 Hz, Non-Interlaced (31.50 MHz dotclock)
36#
37# Horizontal Vertical
38# Resolution 640 480
39# Scan Frequency 37.500 kHz 75.00 Hz
40# Sync Width 2.032 us 0.080 ms
41# 8 chars 3 lines
42# Front Porch 0.508 us 0.027 ms
43# 2 chars 1 lines
44# Back Porch 3.810 us 0.427 ms
45# 15 chars 16 lines
46# Active Time 20.317 us 12.800 ms
47# 80 chars 480 lines
48# Blank Time 6.349 us 0.533 ms
49# 25 chars 20 lines
50# Polarity negative negative
51#
52 mode "640x480-75"
53# D: 31.50 MHz, H: 37.500 kHz, V: 75.00 Hz
54 geometry 640 480 640 480 32 timings 31747 120 16 16 1 64 3 endmode
55#
56# 640x480, 85 Hz, Non-Interlaced (36.000 MHz dotclock)
57#
58# Horizontal Vertical
59# Resolution 640 480
60# Scan Frequency 43.269 kHz 85.00 Hz
61# Sync Width 1.556 us 0.069 ms
62# 7 chars 3 lines
63# Front Porch 1.556 us 0.023 ms
64# 7 chars 1 lines
65# Back Porch 2.222 us 0.578 ms
66# 10 chars 25 lines
67# Active Time 17.778 us 11.093 ms
68# 80 chars 480 lines
69# Blank Time 5.333 us 0.670 ms
70# 24 chars 29 lines
71# Polarity negative negative
72#
73 mode "640x480-85"
74# D: 36.000 MHz, H: 43.269 kHz, V: 85.00 Hz
75 geometry 640 480 640 480 32 timings 27777 80 56 25 1 56 3 endmode
76#
77# 640x480, 100 Hz, Non-Interlaced (43.163 MHz dotclock)
78#
79# Horizontal Vertical
80# Resolution 640 480
81# Scan Frequency 50.900 kHz 100.00 Hz
82# Sync Width 1.483 us 0.058 ms
83# 8 chars 3 lines
84# Front Porch 0.927 us 0.019 ms
85# 5 chars 1 lines
86# Back Porch 2.409 us 0.475 ms
87# 13 chars 25 lines
88# Active Time 14.827 us 9.430 ms
89# 80 chars 480 lines
90# Blank Time 4.819 us 0.570 ms
91# 26 chars 29 lines
92# Polarity positive positive
93#
94 mode "640x480-100"
95# D: 43.163 MHz, H: 50.900 kHz, V: 100.00 Hz
96 geometry 640 480 640 480 32 timings 23168 104 40 25 1 64 3 endmode
97#
98# 640x480, 120 Hz, Non-Interlaced (52.406 MHz dotclock)
99#
100# Horizontal Vertical
101# Resolution 640 480
102# Scan Frequency 61.800 kHz 120.00 Hz
103# Sync Width 1.221 us 0.048 ms
104# 8 chars 3 lines
105# Front Porch 0.763 us 0.016 ms
106# 5 chars 1 lines
107# Back Porch 1.984 us 0.496 ms
108# 13 chars 31 lines
109# Active Time 12.212 us 7.767 ms
110# 80 chars 480 lines
111# Blank Time 3.969 us 0.566 ms
112# 26 chars 35 lines
113# Polarity positive positive
114#
115 mode "640x480-120"
116# D: 52.406 MHz, H: 61.800 kHz, V: 120.00 Hz
117 geometry 640 480 640 480 32 timings 19081 104 40 31 1 64 3 endmode
118#
119# 720x480, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (26.880 MHz dotclock)
120#
121# Horizontal Vertical
122# Resolution 720 480
123# Scan Frequency 30.000 kHz 60.241 Hz
124# Sync Width 2.679 us 0.099 ms
125# 9 chars 3 lines
126# Front Porch 0.595 us 0.033 ms
127# 2 chars 1 lines
128# Back Porch 3.274 us 0.462 ms
129# 11 chars 14 lines
130# Active Time 26.786 us 16.000 ms
131# 90 chars 480 lines
132# Blank Time 6.548 us 0.600 ms
133# 22 chars 18 lines
134# Polarity positive positive
135#
136 mode "720x480-60"
137# D: 26.880 MHz, H: 30.000 kHz, V: 60.24 Hz
138 geometry 720 480 720 480 32 timings 37202 88 16 14 1 72 3 endmode
139#
140# 800x480, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (29.581 MHz dotclock)
141#
142# Horizontal Vertical
143# Resolution 800 480
144# Scan Frequency 29.892 kHz 60.00 Hz
145# Sync Width 2.704 us 100.604 us
146# 10 chars 3 lines
147# Front Porch 0.541 us 33.535 us
148# 2 chars 1 lines
149# Back Porch 3.245 us 435.949 us
150# 12 chars 13 lines
151# Active Time 27.044 us 16.097 ms
152# 100 chars 480 lines
153# Blank Time 6.491 us 0.570 ms
154# 24 chars 17 lines
155# Polarity positive positive
156#
157 mode "800x480-60"
158# D: 29.500 MHz, H: 29.738 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
159 geometry 800 480 800 480 32 timings 33805 96 24 10 3 72 7 endmode
160#
161# 720x576, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (32.668 MHz dotclock)
162#
163# Horizontal Vertical
164# Resolution 720 576
165# Scan Frequency 35.820 kHz 60.00 Hz
166# Sync Width 2.204 us 0.083 ms
167# 9 chars 3 lines
168# Front Porch 0.735 us 0.027 ms
169# 3 chars 1 lines
170# Back Porch 2.939 us 0.459 ms
171# 12 chars 17 lines
172# Active Time 22.040 us 16.080 ms
173# 90 chars 476 lines
174# Blank Time 5.877 us 0.586 ms
175# 24 chars 21 lines
176# Polarity positive positive
177#
178 mode "720x576-60"
179# D: 32.668 MHz, H: 35.820 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
180 geometry 720 576 720 576 32 timings 30611 96 24 17 1 72 3 endmode
181#
182# 800x600, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (40.00 MHz dotclock)
183#
184# Horizontal Vertical
185# Resolution 800 600
186# Scan Frequency 37.879 kHz 60.32 Hz
187# Sync Width 3.200 us 0.106 ms
188# 16 chars 4 lines
189# Front Porch 1.000 us 0.026 ms
190# 5 chars 1 lines
191# Back Porch 2.200 us 0.607 ms
192# 11 chars 23 lines
193# Active Time 20.000 us 15.840 ms
194# 100 chars 600 lines
195# Blank Time 6.400 us 0.739 ms
196# 32 chars 28 lines
197# Polarity positive positive
198#
199 mode "800x600-60"
200# D: 40.00 MHz, H: 37.879 kHz, V: 60.32 Hz
201 geometry 800 600 800 600 32
202 timings 25000 88 40 23 1 128 4 hsync high vsync high endmode
203#
204# 800x600, 75 Hz, Non-Interlaced (49.50 MHz dotclock)
205#
206# Horizontal Vertical
207# Resolution 800 600
208# Scan Frequency 46.875 kHz 75.00 Hz
209# Sync Width 1.616 us 0.064 ms
210# 10 chars 3 lines
211# Front Porch 0.323 us 0.021 ms
212# 2 chars 1 lines
213# Back Porch 3.232 us 0.448 ms
214# 20 chars 21 lines
215# Active Time 16.162 us 12.800 ms
216# 100 chars 600 lines
217# Blank Time 5.172 us 0.533 ms
218# 32 chars 25 lines
219# Polarity positive positive
220#
221 mode "800x600-75"
222# D: 49.50 MHz, H: 46.875 kHz, V: 75.00 Hz
223 geometry 800 600 800 600 32
224 timings 20203 160 16 21 1 80 3 hsync high vsync high endmode
225#
226# 800x600, 85 Hz, Non-Interlaced (56.25 MHz dotclock)
227#
228# Horizontal Vertical
229# Resolution 800 600
230# Scan Frequency 53.674 kHz 85.061 Hz
231# Sync Width 1.138 us 0.056 ms
232# 8 chars 3 lines
233# Front Porch 0.569 us 0.019 ms
234# 4 chars 1 lines
235# Back Porch 2.702 us 0.503 ms
236# 19 chars 27 lines
237# Active Time 14.222 us 11.179 ms
238# 100 chars 600 lines
239# Blank Time 4.409 us 0.578 ms
240# 31 chars 31 lines
241# Polarity positive positive
242#
243 mode "800x600-85"
244# D: 56.25 MHz, H: 53.674 kHz, V: 85.061 Hz
245 geometry 800 600 800 600 32
246 timings 17777 152 32 27 1 64 3 hsync high vsync high endmode
247#
248# 800x600, 100 Hz, Non-Interlaced (67.50 MHz dotclock)
249#
250# Horizontal Vertical
251# Resolution 800 600
252# Scan Frequency 62.500 kHz 100.00 Hz
253# Sync Width 0.948 us 0.064 ms
254# 8 chars 4 lines
255# Front Porch 0.000 us 0.112 ms
256# 0 chars 7 lines
257# Back Porch 3.200 us 0.224 ms
258# 27 chars 14 lines
259# Active Time 11.852 us 9.600 ms
260# 100 chars 600 lines
261# Blank Time 4.148 us 0.400 ms
262# 35 chars 25 lines
263# Polarity positive positive
264#
265 mode "800x600-100"
266# D: 67.50 MHz, H: 62.500 kHz, V: 100.00 Hz
267 geometry 800 600 800 600 32
268 timings 14667 216 0 14 7 64 4 hsync high vsync high endmode
269#
270# 800x600, 120 Hz, Non-Interlaced (83.950 MHz dotclock)
271#
272# Horizontal Vertical
273# Resolution 800 600
274# Scan Frequency 77.160 kHz 120.00 Hz
275# Sync Width 1.048 us 0.039 ms
276# 11 chars 3 lines
277# Front Porch 0.667 us 0.013 ms
278# 7 chars 1 lines
279# Back Porch 1.715 us 0.507 ms
280# 18 chars 39 lines
281# Active Time 9.529 us 7.776 ms
282# 100 chars 600 lines
283# Blank Time 3.431 us 0.557 ms
284# 36 chars 43 lines
285# Polarity positive positive
286#
287 mode "800x600-120"
288# D: 83.950 MHz, H: 77.160 kHz, V: 120.00 Hz
289 geometry 800 600 800 600 32
290 timings 11912 144 56 39 1 88 3 hsync high vsync high endmode
291#
292# 848x480, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (31.490 MHz dotclock)
293#
294# Horizontal Vertical
295# Resolution 848 480
296# Scan Frequency 29.820 kHz 60.00 Hz
297# Sync Width 2.795 us 0.099 ms
298# 11 chars 3 lines
299# Front Porch 0.508 us 0.033 ms
300# 2 chars 1 lines
301# Back Porch 3.303 us 0.429 ms
302# 13 chars 13 lines
303# Active Time 26.929 us 16.097 ms
304# 106 chars 480 lines
305# Blank Time 6.605 us 0.570 ms
306# 26 chars 17 lines
307# Polarity positive positive
308#
309 mode "848x480-60"
310# D: 31.500 MHz, H: 29.830 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
311 geometry 848 480 848 480 32
312 timings 31746 104 24 12 3 80 5 hsync high vsync high endmode
313#
314# 856x480, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (31.728 MHz dotclock)
315#
316# Horizontal Vertical
317# Resolution 856 480
318# Scan Frequency 29.820 kHz 60.00 Hz
319# Sync Width 2.774 us 0.099 ms
320# 11 chars 3 lines
321# Front Porch 0.504 us 0.033 ms
322# 2 chars 1 lines
323# Back Porch 3.728 us 0.429 ms
324# 13 chars 13 lines
325# Active Time 26.979 us 16.097 ms
326# 107 chars 480 lines
327# Blank Time 6.556 us 0.570 ms
328# 26 chars 17 lines
329# Polarity positive positive
330#
331 mode "856x480-60"
332# D: 31.728 MHz, H: 29.820 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
333 geometry 856 480 856 480 32
334 timings 31518 104 16 13 1 88 3
335 hsync high vsync high endmode mode "960x600-60"
336# D: 45.250 MHz, H: 37.212 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
337 geometry 960 600 960 600 32 timings 22099 128 32 15 3 96 6 endmode
338#
339# 1000x600, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (48.068 MHz dotclock)
340#
341# Horizontal Vertical
342# Resolution 1000 600
343# Scan Frequency 37.320 kHz 60.00 Hz
344# Sync Width 2.164 us 0.080 ms
345# 13 chars 3 lines
346# Front Porch 0.832 us 0.027 ms
347# 5 chars 1 lines
348# Back Porch 2.996 us 0.483 ms
349# 18 chars 18 lines
350# Active Time 20.804 us 16.077 ms
351# 125 chars 600 lines
352# Blank Time 5.991 us 0.589 ms
353# 36 chars 22 lines
354# Polarity negative positive
355#
356 mode "1000x600-60"
357# D: 48.068 MHz, H: 37.320 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
358 geometry 1000 600 1000 600 32
359 timings 20834 144 40 18 1 104 3 endmode mode "1024x576-60"
360# D: 46.996 MHz, H: 35.820 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
361 geometry 1024 576 1024 576 32
362 timings 21278 144 40 17 1 104 3 endmode mode "1024x600-60"
363# D: 48.964 MHz, H: 37.320 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
364 geometry 1024 600 1024 600 32
365 timings 20461 144 40 18 1 104 3 endmode mode "1088x612-60"
366# D: 52.952 MHz, H: 38.040 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
367 geometry 1088 612 1088 612 32 timings 18877 152 48 16 3 104 5 endmode
368#
369# 1024x512, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (41.291 MHz dotclock)
370#
371# Horizontal Vertical
372# Resolution 1024 512
373# Scan Frequency 31.860 kHz 60.00 Hz
374# Sync Width 2.519 us 0.094 ms
375# 13 chars 3 lines
376# Front Porch 0.775 us 0.031 ms
377# 4 chars 1 lines
378# Back Porch 3.294 us 0.465 ms
379# 17 chars 15 lines
380# Active Time 24.800 us 16.070 ms
381# 128 chars 512 lines
382# Blank Time 6.587 us 0.596 ms
383# 34 chars 19 lines
384# Polarity positive positive
385#
386 mode "1024x512-60"
387# D: 41.291 MHz, H: 31.860 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
388 geometry 1024 512 1024 512 32
389 timings 24218 126 32 15 1 104 3 hsync high vsync high endmode
390#
391# 1024x600, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (48.875 MHz dotclock)
392#
393# Horizontal Vertical
394# Resolution 1024 768
395# Scan Frequency 37.252 kHz 60.00 Hz
396# Sync Width 2.128 us 80.532us
397# 13 chars 3 lines
398# Front Porch 0.818 us 26.844 us
399# 5 chars 1 lines
400# Back Porch 2.946 us 483.192 us
401# 18 chars 18 lines
402# Active Time 20.951 us 16.697 ms
403# 128 chars 622 lines
404# Blank Time 5.893 us 0.591 ms
405# 36 chars 22 lines
406# Polarity negative positive
407#
408#mode "1024x600-60"
409# # D: 48.875 MHz, H: 37.252 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
410# geometry 1024 600 1024 600 32
411# timings 20460 144 40 18 1 104 3
412# endmode
413#
414# 1024x768, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (65.00 MHz dotclock)
415#
416# Horizontal Vertical
417# Resolution 1024 768
418# Scan Frequency 48.363 kHz 60.00 Hz
419# Sync Width 2.092 us 0.124 ms
420# 17 chars 6 lines
421# Front Porch 0.369 us 0.062 ms
422# 3 chars 3 lines
423# Back Porch 2.462 us 0.601 ms
424# 20 chars 29 lines
425# Active Time 15.754 us 15.880 ms
426# 128 chars 768 lines
427# Blank Time 4.923 us 0.786 ms
428# 40 chars 38 lines
429# Polarity negative negative
430#
431 mode "1024x768-60"
432# D: 65.00 MHz, H: 48.363 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
433 geometry 1024 768 1024 768 32 timings 15385 160 24 29 3 136 6 endmode
434#
435# 1024x768, 75 Hz, Non-Interlaced (78.75 MHz dotclock)
436#
437# Horizontal Vertical
438# Resolution 1024 768
439# Scan Frequency 60.023 kHz 75.03 Hz
440# Sync Width 1.219 us 0.050 ms
441# 12 chars 3 lines
442# Front Porch 0.203 us 0.017 ms
443# 2 chars 1 lines
444# Back Porch 2.235 us 0.466 ms
445# 22 chars 28 lines
446# Active Time 13.003 us 12.795 ms
447# 128 chars 768 lines
448# Blank Time 3.657 us 0.533 ms
449# 36 chars 32 lines
450# Polarity positive positive
451#
452 mode "1024x768-75"
453# D: 78.75 MHz, H: 60.023 kHz, V: 75.03 Hz
454 geometry 1024 768 1024 768 32
455 timings 12699 176 16 28 1 96 3 hsync high vsync high endmode
456#
457# 1024x768, 85 Hz, Non-Interlaced (94.50 MHz dotclock)
458#
459# Horizontal Vertical
460# Resolution 1024 768
461# Scan Frequency 68.677 kHz 85.00 Hz
462# Sync Width 1.016 us 0.044 ms
463# 12 chars 3 lines
464# Front Porch 0.508 us 0.015 ms
465# 6 chars 1 lines
466# Back Porch 2.201 us 0.524 ms
467# 26 chars 36 lines
468# Active Time 10.836 us 11.183 ms
469# 128 chars 768 lines
470# Blank Time 3.725 us 0.582 ms
471# 44 chars 40 lines
472# Polarity positive positive
473#
474 mode "1024x768-85"
475# D: 94.50 MHz, H: 68.677 kHz, V: 85.00 Hz
476 geometry 1024 768 1024 768 32
477 timings 10582 208 48 36 1 96 3 hsync high vsync high endmode
478#
479# 1024x768, 100 Hz, Non-Interlaced (110.0 MHz dotclock)
480#
481# Horizontal Vertical
482# Resolution 1024 768
483# Scan Frequency 79.023 kHz 99.78 Hz
484# Sync Width 0.800 us 0.101 ms
485# 11 chars 8 lines
486# Front Porch 0.000 us 0.000 ms
487# 0 chars 0 lines
488# Back Porch 2.545 us 0.202 ms
489# 35 chars 16 lines
490# Active Time 9.309 us 9.719 ms
491# 128 chars 768 lines
492# Blank Time 3.345 us 0.304 ms
493# 46 chars 24 lines
494# Polarity negative negative
495#
496 mode "1024x768-100"
497# D: 113.3 MHz, H: 79.023 kHz, V: 99.78 Hz
498 geometry 1024 768 1024 768 32
499 timings 8825 280 0 16 0 88 8 endmode mode "1152x720-60"
500# D: 66.750 MHz, H: 44.859 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
501 geometry 1152 720 1152 720 32 timings 14981 168 56 19 3 112 6 endmode
502#
503# 1152x864, 75 Hz, Non-Interlaced (110.0 MHz dotclock)
504#
505# Horizontal Vertical
506# Resolution 1152 864
507# Scan Frequency 75.137 kHz 74.99 Hz
508# Sync Width 1.309 us 0.106 ms
509# 18 chars 8 lines
510# Front Porch 0.245 us 0.599 ms
511# 3 chars 45 lines
512# Back Porch 1.282 us 1.132 ms
513# 18 chars 85 lines
514# Active Time 10.473 us 11.499 ms
515# 144 chars 864 lines
516# Blank Time 2.836 us 1.837 ms
517# 39 chars 138 lines
518# Polarity positive positive
519#
520 mode "1152x864-75"
521# D: 110.0 MHz, H: 75.137 kHz, V: 74.99 Hz
522 geometry 1152 864 1152 864 32
523 timings 9259 144 24 85 45 144 8
524 hsync high vsync high endmode mode "1200x720-60"
525# D: 70.184 MHz, H: 44.760 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
526 geometry 1200 720 1200 720 32
527 timings 14253 184 28 22 1 128 3 endmode mode "1280x600-60"
528# D: 61.503 MHz, H: 37.320 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
529 geometry 1280 600 1280 600 32
530 timings 16260 184 28 18 1 128 3 endmode mode "1280x720-50"
531# D: 60.466 MHz, H: 37.050 kHz, V: 50.00 Hz
532 geometry 1280 720 1280 720 32
533 timings 16538 176 48 17 1 128 3 endmode mode "1280x768-50"
534# D: 65.178 MHz, H: 39.550 kHz, V: 50.00 Hz
535 geometry 1280 768 1280 768 32 timings 15342 184 28 19 1 128 3 endmode
536#
537# 1280x768, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (80.136 MHz dotclock)
538#
539# Horizontal Vertical
540# Resolution 1280 768
541# Scan Frequency 47.700 kHz 60.00 Hz
542# Sync Width 1.697 us 0.063 ms
543# 17 chars 3 lines
544# Front Porch 0.799 us 0.021 ms
545# 8 chars 1 lines
546# Back Porch 2.496 us 0.483 ms
547# 25 chars 23 lines
548# Active Time 15.973 us 16.101 ms
549# 160 chars 768 lines
550# Blank Time 4.992 us 0.566 ms
551# 50 chars 27 lines
552# Polarity positive positive
553#
554 mode "1280x768-60"
555# D: 80.13 MHz, H: 47.700 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
556 geometry 1280 768 1280 768 32
557 timings 12480 200 48 23 1 126 3 hsync high vsync high endmode
558#
559# 1280x800, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (83.375 MHz dotclock)
560#
561# Horizontal Vertical
562# Resolution 1280 800
563# Scan Frequency 49.628 kHz 60.00 Hz
564# Sync Width 1.631 us 60.450 us
565# 17 chars 3 lines
566# Front Porch 0.768 us 20.15 us
567# 8 chars 1 lines
568# Back Porch 2.399 us 0.483 ms
569# 25 chars 24 lines
570# Active Time 15.352 us 16.120 ms
571# 160 chars 800 lines
572# Blank Time 4.798 us 0.564 ms
573# 50 chars 28 lines
574# Polarity negtive positive
575#
576 mode "1280x800-60"
577# D: 83.500 MHz, H: 49.702 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
578 geometry 1280 800 1280 800 32 timings 11994 200 72 22 3 128 6 endmode
579#
580# 1280x960, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (108.00 MHz dotclock)
581#
582# Horizontal Vertical
583# Resolution 1280 960
584# Scan Frequency 60.000 kHz 60.00 Hz
585# Sync Width 1.037 us 0.050 ms
586# 14 chars 3 lines
587# Front Porch 0.889 us 0.017 ms
588# 12 chars 1 lines
589# Back Porch 2.889 us 0.600 ms
590# 39 chars 36 lines
591# Active Time 11.852 us 16.000 ms
592# 160 chars 960 lines
593# Blank Time 4.815 us 0.667 ms
594# 65 chars 40 lines
595# Polarity positive positive
596#
597 mode "1280x960-60"
598# D: 108.00 MHz, H: 60.000 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
599 geometry 1280 960 1280 960 32
600 timings 9259 312 96 36 1 112 3 hsync high vsync high endmode
601#
602# 1280x1024, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (108.00 MHz dotclock)
603#
604# Horizontal Vertical
605# Resolution 1280 1024
606# Scan Frequency 63.981 kHz 60.02 Hz
607# Sync Width 1.037 us 0.047 ms
608# 14 chars 3 lines
609# Front Porch 0.444 us 0.015 ms
610# 6 chars 1 lines
611# Back Porch 2.297 us 0.594 ms
612# 31 chars 38 lines
613# Active Time 11.852 us 16.005 ms
614# 160 chars 1024 lines
615# Blank Time 3.778 us 0.656 ms
616# 51 chars 42 lines
617# Polarity positive positive
618#
619 mode "1280x1024-60"
620# D: 108.00 MHz, H: 63.981 kHz, V: 60.02 Hz
621 geometry 1280 1024 1280 1024 32
622 timings 9260 248 48 38 1 112 3 hsync high vsync high endmode
623#
624# 1280x1024, 75 Hz, Non-Interlaced (135.00 MHz dotclock)
625#
626# Horizontal Vertical
627# Resolution 1280 1024
628# Scan Frequency 79.976 kHz 75.02 Hz
629# Sync Width 1.067 us 0.038 ms
630# 18 chars 3 lines
631# Front Porch 0.119 us 0.012 ms
632# 2 chars 1 lines
633# Back Porch 1.837 us 0.475 ms
634# 31 chars 38 lines
635# Active Time 9.481 us 12.804 ms
636# 160 chars 1024 lines
637# Blank Time 3.022 us 0.525 ms
638# 51 chars 42 lines
639# Polarity positive positive
640#
641 mode "1280x1024-75"
642# D: 135.00 MHz, H: 79.976 kHz, V: 75.02 Hz
643 geometry 1280 1024 1280 1024 32
644 timings 7408 248 16 38 1 144 3 hsync high vsync high endmode
645#
646# 1280x1024, 85 Hz, Non-Interlaced (157.50 MHz dotclock)
647#
648# Horizontal Vertical
649# Resolution 1280 1024
650# Scan Frequency 91.146 kHz 85.02 Hz
651# Sync Width 1.016 us 0.033 ms
652# 20 chars 3 lines
653# Front Porch 0.406 us 0.011 ms
654# 8 chars 1 lines
655# Back Porch 1.422 us 0.483 ms
656# 28 chars 44 lines
657# Active Time 8.127 us 11.235 ms
658# 160 chars 1024 lines
659# Blank Time 2.844 us 0.527 ms
660# 56 chars 48 lines
661# Polarity positive positive
662#
663 mode "1280x1024-85"
664# D: 157.50 MHz, H: 91.146 kHz, V: 85.02 Hz
665 geometry 1280 1024 1280 1024 32
666 timings 6349 224 64 44 1 160 3
667 hsync high vsync high endmode mode "1440x900-60"
668# D: 106.500 MHz, H: 55.935 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
669 geometry 1440 900 1440 900 32
670 timings 9390 232 80 25 3 152 6
671 hsync high vsync high endmode mode "1440x900-75"
672# D: 136.750 MHz, H: 70.635 kHz, V: 75.00 Hz
673 geometry 1440 900 1440 900 32
674 timings 7315 248 96 33 3 152 6 hsync high vsync high endmode
675#
676# 1440x1050, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (125.10 MHz dotclock)
677#
678# Horizontal Vertical
679# Resolution 1440 1050
680# Scan Frequency 65.220 kHz 60.00 Hz
681# Sync Width 1.204 us 0.046 ms
682# 19 chars 3 lines
683# Front Porch 0.760 us 0.015 ms
684# 12 chars 1 lines
685# Back Porch 1.964 us 0.495 ms
686# 31 chars 33 lines
687# Active Time 11.405 us 16.099 ms
688# 180 chars 1050 lines
689# Blank Time 3.928 us 0.567 ms
690# 62 chars 37 lines
691# Polarity positive positive
692#
693 mode "1440x1050-60"
694# D: 125.10 MHz, H: 65.220 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
695 geometry 1440 1050 1440 1050 32
696 timings 7993 248 96 33 1 152 3
697 hsync high vsync high endmode mode "1600x900-60"
698# D: 118.250 MHz, H: 55.990 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
699 geometry 1600 900 1600 900 32
700 timings 8415 256 88 26 3 168 5 endmode mode "1600x1024-60"
701# D: 136.358 MHz, H: 63.600 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
702 geometry 1600 1024 1600 1024 32 timings 7315 272 104 32 1 168 3 endmode
703#
704# 1600x1200, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (156.00 MHz dotclock)
705#
706# Horizontal Vertical
707# Resolution 1600 1200
708# Scan Frequency 76.200 kHz 60.00 Hz
709# Sync Width 1.026 us 0.105 ms
710# 20 chars 8 lines
711# Front Porch 0.205 us 0.131 ms
712# 4 chars 10 lines
713# Back Porch 1.636 us 0.682 ms
714# 32 chars 52 lines
715# Active Time 10.256 us 15.748 ms
716# 200 chars 1200 lines
717# Blank Time 2.872 us 0.866 ms
718# 56 chars 66 lines
719# Polarity negative negative
720#
721 mode "1600x1200-60"
722# D: 156.00 MHz, H: 76.200 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
723 geometry 1600 1200 1600 1200 32 timings 6172 256 32 52 10 160 8 endmode
724#
725# 1600x1200, 75 Hz, Non-Interlaced (202.50 MHz dotclock)
726#
727# Horizontal Vertical
728# Resolution 1600 1200
729# Scan Frequency 93.750 kHz 75.00 Hz
730# Sync Width 0.948 us 0.032 ms
731# 24 chars 3 lines
732# Front Porch 0.316 us 0.011 ms
733# 8 chars 1 lines
734# Back Porch 1.501 us 0.491 ms
735# 38 chars 46 lines
736# Active Time 7.901 us 12.800 ms
737# 200 chars 1200 lines
738# Blank Time 2.765 us 0.533 ms
739# 70 chars 50 lines
740# Polarity positive positive
741#
742 mode "1600x1200-75"
743# D: 202.50 MHz, H: 93.750 kHz, V: 75.00 Hz
744 geometry 1600 1200 1600 1200 32
745 timings 4938 304 64 46 1 192 3
746 hsync high vsync high endmode mode "1680x1050-60"
747# D: 146.250 MHz, H: 65.290 kHz, V: 59.954 Hz
748 geometry 1680 1050 1680 1050 32
749 timings 6814 280 104 30 3 176 6
750 hsync high vsync high endmode mode "1680x1050-75"
751# D: 187.000 MHz, H: 82.306 kHz, V: 74.892 Hz
752 geometry 1680 1050 1680 1050 32
753 timings 5348 296 120 40 3 176 6
754 hsync high vsync high endmode mode "1792x1344-60"
755# D: 202.975 MHz, H: 83.460 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
756 geometry 1792 1344 1792 1344 32
757 timings 4902 320 128 43 1 192 3
758 hsync high vsync high endmode mode "1856x1392-60"
759# D: 218.571 MHz, H: 86.460 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
760 geometry 1856 1392 1856 1392 32
761 timings 4577 336 136 45 1 200 3
762 hsync high vsync high endmode mode "1920x1200-60"
763# D: 193.250 MHz, H: 74.556 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
764 geometry 1920 1200 1920 1200 32
765 timings 5173 336 136 36 3 200 6
766 hsync high vsync high endmode mode "1920x1440-60"
767# D: 234.000 MHz, H:90.000 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
768 geometry 1920 1440 1920 1440 32
769 timings 4274 344 128 56 1 208 3
770 hsync high vsync high endmode mode "1920x1440-75"
771# D: 297.000 MHz, H:112.500 kHz, V: 75.00 Hz
772 geometry 1920 1440 1920 1440 32
773 timings 3367 352 144 56 1 224 3
774 hsync high vsync high endmode mode "2048x1536-60"
775# D: 267.250 MHz, H: 95.446 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
776 geometry 2048 1536 2048 1536 32
777 timings 3742 376 152 49 3 224 4 hsync high vsync high endmode
778#
779# 1280x720, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (74.481 MHz dotclock)
780#
781# Horizontal Vertical
782# Resolution 1280 720
783# Scan Frequency 44.760 kHz 60.00 Hz
784# Sync Width 1.826 us 67.024 ms
785# 17 chars 3 lines
786# Front Porch 0.752 us 22.341 ms
787# 7 chars 1 lines
788# Back Porch 2.578 us 491.510 ms
789# 24 chars 22 lines
790# Active Time 17.186 us 16.086 ms
791# 160 chars 720 lines
792# Blank Time 5.156 us 0.581 ms
793# 48 chars 26 lines
794# Polarity negative negative
795#
796 mode "1280x720-60"
797# D: 74.481 MHz, H: 44.760 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
798 geometry 1280 720 1280 720 32 timings 13426 192 64 22 1 136 3 endmode
799#
800# 1920x1080, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (172.798 MHz dotclock)
801#
802# Horizontal Vertical
803# Resolution 1920 1080
804# Scan Frequency 67.080 kHz 60.00 Hz
805# Sync Width 1.204 us 44.723 ms
806# 26 chars 3 lines
807# Front Porch 0.694 us 14.908 ms
808# 15 chars 1 lines
809# Back Porch 1.898 us 506.857 ms
810# 41 chars 34 lines
811# Active Time 11.111 us 16.100 ms
812# 240 chars 1080 lines
813# Blank Time 3.796 us 0.566 ms
814# 82 chars 38 lines
815# Polarity negative negative
816#
817 mode "1920x1080-60"
818# D: 74.481 MHz, H: 67.080 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
819 geometry 1920 1080 1920 1080 32 timings 5787 328 120 34 1 208 3 endmode
820#
821# 1400x1050, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (122.61 MHz dotclock)
822#
823# Horizontal Vertical
824# Resolution 1400 1050
825# Scan Frequency 65.218 kHz 59.99 Hz
826# Sync Width 1.037 us 0.047 ms
827# 19 chars 3 lines
828# Front Porch 0.444 us 0.015 ms
829# 11 chars 1 lines
830# Back Porch 1.185 us 0.188 ms
831# 30 chars 33 lines
832# Active Time 12.963 us 16.411 ms
833# 175 chars 1050 lines
834# Blank Time 2.667 us 0.250 ms
835# 60 chars 37 lines
836# Polarity negative positive
837#
838 mode "1400x1050-60"
839# D: 122.750 MHz, H: 65.317 kHz, V: 59.99 Hz
840 geometry 1400 1050 1408 1050 32
841 timings 8214 232 88 32 3 144 4 endmode mode "1400x1050-75"
842# D: 156.000 MHz, H: 82.278 kHz, V: 74.867 Hz
843 geometry 1400 1050 1408 1050 32 timings 6410 248 104 42 3 144 4 endmode
844#
845# 1366x768, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (85.86 MHz dotclock)
846#
847# Horizontal Vertical
848# Resolution 1366 768
849# Scan Frequency 47.700 kHz 60.00 Hz
850# Sync Width 1.677 us 0.063 ms
851# 18 chars 3 lines
852# Front Porch 0.839 us 0.021 ms
853# 9 chars 1 lines
854# Back Porch 2.516 us 0.482 ms
855# 27 chars 23 lines
856# Active Time 15.933 us 16.101 ms
857# 171 chars 768 lines
858# Blank Time 5.031 us 0.566 ms
859# 54 chars 27 lines
860# Polarity negative positive
861#
862 mode "1360x768-60"
863# D: 84.750 MHz, H: 47.720 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
864 geometry 1360 768 1360 768 32
865 timings 11799 208 72 22 3 136 5 endmode mode "1366x768-60"
866# D: 85.86 MHz, H: 47.700 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
867 geometry 1366 768 1366 768 32
868 timings 11647 216 72 23 1 144 3 endmode mode "1366x768-50"
869# D: 69,924 MHz, H: 39.550 kHz, V: 50.00 Hz
870 geometry 1366 768 1366 768 32 timings 14301 200 56 19 1 144 3 endmode
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/viafb.txt b/Documentation/fb/viafb.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..67dbf442b0b6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/fb/viafb.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,214 @@
1
2 VIA Integration Graphic Chip Console Framebuffer Driver
3
4[Platform]
5-----------------------
6 The console framebuffer driver is for graphics chips of
7 VIA UniChrome Family(CLE266, PM800 / CN400 / CN300,
8 P4M800CE / P4M800Pro / CN700 / VN800,
9 CX700 / VX700, K8M890, P4M890,
10 CN896 / P4M900, VX800)
11
12[Driver features]
13------------------------
14 Device: CRT, LCD, DVI
15
16 Support viafb_mode:
17 CRT:
18 640x480(60, 75, 85, 100, 120 Hz), 720x480(60 Hz),
19 720x576(60 Hz), 800x600(60, 75, 85, 100, 120 Hz),
20 848x480(60 Hz), 856x480(60 Hz), 1024x512(60 Hz),
21 1024x768(60, 75, 85, 100 Hz), 1152x864(75 Hz),
22 1280x768(60 Hz), 1280x960(60 Hz), 1280x1024(60, 75, 85 Hz),
23 1440x1050(60 Hz), 1600x1200(60, 75 Hz), 1280x720(60 Hz),
24 1920x1080(60 Hz), 1400x1050(60 Hz), 800x480(60 Hz)
25
26 color depth: 8 bpp, 16 bpp, 32 bpp supports.
27
28 Support 2D hardware accelerator.
29
30[Using the viafb module]
31-- -- --------------------
32 Start viafb with default settings:
33 #modprobe viafb
34
35 Start viafb with with user options:
36 #modprobe viafb viafb_mode=800x600 viafb_bpp=16 viafb_refresh=60
37 viafb_active_dev=CRT+DVI viafb_dvi_port=DVP1
38 viafb_mode1=1024x768 viafb_bpp=16 viafb_refresh1=60
39 viafb_SAMM_ON=1
40
41 viafb_mode:
42 640x480 (default)
43 720x480
44 800x600
45 1024x768
46 ......
47
48 viafb_bpp:
49 8, 16, 32 (default:32)
50
51 viafb_refresh:
52 60, 75, 85, 100, 120 (default:60)
53
54 viafb_lcd_dsp_method:
55 0 : expansion (default)
56 1 : centering
57
58 viafb_lcd_mode:
59 0 : LCD panel with LSB data format input (default)
60 1 : LCD panel with MSB data format input
61
62 viafb_lcd_panel_id:
63 0 : Resolution: 640x480, Channel: single, Dithering: Enable
64 1 : Resolution: 800x600, Channel: single, Dithering: Enable
65 2 : Resolution: 1024x768, Channel: single, Dithering: Enable (default)
66 3 : Resolution: 1280x768, Channel: single, Dithering: Enable
67 4 : Resolution: 1280x1024, Channel: dual, Dithering: Enable
68 5 : Resolution: 1400x1050, Channel: dual, Dithering: Enable
69 6 : Resolution: 1600x1200, Channel: dual, Dithering: Enable
70
71 8 : Resolution: 800x480, Channel: single, Dithering: Enable
72 9 : Resolution: 1024x768, Channel: dual, Dithering: Enable
73 10: Resolution: 1024x768, Channel: single, Dithering: Disable
74 11: Resolution: 1024x768, Channel: dual, Dithering: Disable
75 12: Resolution: 1280x768, Channel: single, Dithering: Disable
76 13: Resolution: 1280x1024, Channel: dual, Dithering: Disable
77 14: Resolution: 1400x1050, Channel: dual, Dithering: Disable
78 15: Resolution: 1600x1200, Channel: dual, Dithering: Disable
79 16: Resolution: 1366x768, Channel: single, Dithering: Disable
80 17: Resolution: 1024x600, Channel: single, Dithering: Enable
81 18: Resolution: 1280x768, Channel: dual, Dithering: Enable
82 19: Resolution: 1280x800, Channel: single, Dithering: Enable
83
84 viafb_accel:
85 0 : No 2D Hardware Acceleration
86 1 : 2D Hardware Acceleration (default)
87
88 viafb_SAMM_ON:
89 0 : viafb_SAMM_ON disable (default)
90 1 : viafb_SAMM_ON enable
91
92 viafb_mode1: (secondary display device)
93 640x480 (default)
94 720x480
95 800x600
96 1024x768
97 ... ...
98
99 viafb_bpp1: (secondary display device)
100 8, 16, 32 (default:32)
101
102 viafb_refresh1: (secondary display device)
103 60, 75, 85, 100, 120 (default:60)
104
105 viafb_active_dev:
106 This option is used to specify active devices.(CRT, DVI, CRT+LCD...)
107 DVI stands for DVI or HDMI, E.g., If you want to enable HDMI,
108 set viafb_active_dev=DVI. In SAMM case, the previous of
109 viafb_active_dev is primary device, and the following is
110 secondary device.
111
112 For example:
113 To enable one device, such as DVI only, we can use:
114 modprobe viafb viafb_active_dev=DVI
115 To enable two devices, such as CRT+DVI:
116 modprobe viafb viafb_active_dev=CRT+DVI;
117
118 For DuoView case, we can use:
119 modprobe viafb viafb_active_dev=CRT+DVI
120 OR
121 modprobe viafb viafb_active_dev=DVI+CRT...
122
123 For SAMM case:
124 If CRT is primary and DVI is secondary, we should use:
125 modprobe viafb viafb_active_dev=CRT+DVI viafb_SAMM_ON=1...
126 If DVI is primary and CRT is secondary, we should use:
127 modprobe viafb viafb_active_dev=DVI+CRT viafb_SAMM_ON=1...
128
129 viafb_display_hardware_layout:
130 This option is used to specify display hardware layout for CX700 chip.
131 1 : LCD only
132 2 : DVI only
133 3 : LCD+DVI (default)
134 4 : LCD1+LCD2 (internal + internal)
135 16: LCD1+ExternalLCD2 (internal + external)
136
137 viafb_second_size:
138 This option is used to set second device memory size(MB) in SAMM case.
139 The minimal size is 16.
140
141 viafb_platform_epia_dvi:
142 This option is used to enable DVI on EPIA - M
143 0 : No DVI on EPIA - M (default)
144 1 : DVI on EPIA - M
145
146 viafb_bus_width:
147 When using 24 - Bit Bus Width Digital Interface,
148 this option should be set.
149 12: 12-Bit LVDS or 12-Bit TMDS (default)
150 24: 24-Bit LVDS or 24-Bit TMDS
151
152 viafb_device_lcd_dualedge:
153 When using Dual Edge Panel, this option should be set.
154 0 : No Dual Edge Panel (default)
155 1 : Dual Edge Panel
156
157 viafb_video_dev:
158 This option is used to specify video output devices(CRT, DVI, LCD) for
159 duoview case.
160 For example:
161 To output video on DVI, we should use:
162 modprobe viafb viafb_video_dev=DVI...
163
164 viafb_lcd_port:
165 This option is used to specify LCD output port,
166 available values are "DVP0" "DVP1" "DFP_HIGHLOW" "DFP_HIGH" "DFP_LOW".
167 for external LCD + external DVI on CX700(External LCD is on DVP0),
168 we should use:
169 modprobe viafb viafb_lcd_port=DVP0...
170
171Notes:
172 1. CRT may not display properly for DuoView CRT & DVI display at
173 the "640x480" PAL mode with DVI overscan enabled.
174 2. SAMM stands for single adapter multi monitors. It is different from
175 multi-head since SAMM support multi monitor at driver layers, thus fbcon
176 layer doesn't even know about it; SAMM's second screen doesn't have a
177 device node file, thus a user mode application can't access it directly.
178 When SAMM is enabled, viafb_mode and viafb_mode1, viafb_bpp and
179 viafb_bpp1, viafb_refresh and viafb_refresh1 can be different.
180 3. When console is depending on viafbinfo1, dynamically change resolution
181 and bpp, need to call VIAFB specified ioctl interface VIAFB_SET_DEVICE
182 instead of calling common ioctl function FBIOPUT_VSCREENINFO since
183 viafb doesn't support multi-head well, or it will cause screen crush.
184 4. VX800 2D accelerator hasn't been supported in this driver yet. When
185 using driver on VX800, the driver will disable the acceleration
186 function as default.
187
188
189[Configure viafb with "fbset" tool]
190-----------------------------------
191 "fbset" is an inbox utility of Linux.
192 1. Inquire current viafb information, type,
193 # fbset -i
194
195 2. Set various resolutions and viafb_refresh rates,
196 # fbset <resolution-vertical_sync>
197
198 example,
199 # fbset "1024x768-75"
200 or
201 # fbset -g 1024 768 1024 768 32
202 Check the file "/etc/fb.modes" to find display modes available.
203
204 3. Set the color depth,
205 # fbset -depth <value>
206
207 example,
208 # fbset -depth 16
209
210[Bootup with viafb]:
211--------------------
212 Add the following line to your grub.conf:
213 append = "video=viafb:viafb_mode=1024x768,viafb_bpp=32,viafb_refresh=85"
214
diff --git a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt
index 83c88cae1eda..f5f812daf9f4 100644
--- a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt
+++ b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt
@@ -6,6 +6,24 @@ be removed from this file.
6 6
7--------------------------- 7---------------------------
8 8
9What: old static regulatory information and ieee80211_regdom module parameter
10When: 2.6.29
11Why: The old regulatory infrastructure has been replaced with a new one
12 which does not require statically defined regulatory domains. We do
13 not want to keep static regulatory domains in the kernel due to the
14 the dynamic nature of regulatory law and localization. We kept around
15 the old static definitions for the regulatory domains of:
16 * US
17 * JP
18 * EU
19 and used by default the US when CONFIG_WIRELESS_OLD_REGULATORY was
20 set. We also kept around the ieee80211_regdom module parameter in case
21 some applications were relying on it. Changing regulatory domains
22 can now be done instead by using nl80211, as is done with iw.
23Who: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com>
24
25---------------------------
26
9What: dev->power.power_state 27What: dev->power.power_state
10When: July 2007 28When: July 2007
11Why: Broken design for runtime control over driver power states, confusing 29Why: Broken design for runtime control over driver power states, confusing
@@ -232,6 +250,9 @@ What (Why):
232 - xt_mark match revision 0 250 - xt_mark match revision 0
233 (superseded by xt_mark match revision 1) 251 (superseded by xt_mark match revision 1)
234 252
253 - xt_recent: the old ipt_recent proc dir
254 (superseded by /proc/net/xt_recent)
255
235When: January 2009 or Linux 2.7.0, whichever comes first 256When: January 2009 or Linux 2.7.0, whichever comes first
236Why: Superseded by newer revisions or modules 257Why: Superseded by newer revisions or modules
237Who: Jan Engelhardt <jengelh@computergmbh.de> 258Who: Jan Engelhardt <jengelh@computergmbh.de>
@@ -266,11 +287,19 @@ Who: Glauber Costa <gcosta@redhat.com>
266 287
267--------------------------- 288---------------------------
268 289
269What: old style serial driver for ColdFire (CONFIG_SERIAL_COLDFIRE) 290What: remove HID compat support
270When: 2.6.28 291When: 2.6.29
271Why: This driver still uses the old interface and has been replaced 292Why: needed only as a temporary solution until distros fix themselves up
272 by CONFIG_SERIAL_MCF. 293Who: Jiri Slaby <jirislaby@gmail.com>
273Who: Sebastian Siewior <sebastian@breakpoint.cc> 294
295---------------------------
296
297What: print_fn_descriptor_symbol()
298When: October 2009
299Why: The %pF vsprintf format provides the same functionality in a
300 simpler way. print_fn_descriptor_symbol() is deprecated but
301 still present to give out-of-tree modules time to change.
302Who: Bjorn Helgaas <bjorn.helgaas@hp.com>
274 303
275--------------------------- 304---------------------------
276 305
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/autofs4-mount-control.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/autofs4-mount-control.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c6341745df37
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/autofs4-mount-control.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,393 @@
1
2Miscellaneous Device control operations for the autofs4 kernel module
3====================================================================
4
5The problem
6===========
7
8There is a problem with active restarts in autofs (that is to say
9restarting autofs when there are busy mounts).
10
11During normal operation autofs uses a file descriptor opened on the
12directory that is being managed in order to be able to issue control
13operations. Using a file descriptor gives ioctl operations access to
14autofs specific information stored in the super block. The operations
15are things such as setting an autofs mount catatonic, setting the
16expire timeout and requesting expire checks. As is explained below,
17certain types of autofs triggered mounts can end up covering an autofs
18mount itself which prevents us being able to use open(2) to obtain a
19file descriptor for these operations if we don't already have one open.
20
21Currently autofs uses "umount -l" (lazy umount) to clear active mounts
22at restart. While using lazy umount works for most cases, anything that
23needs to walk back up the mount tree to construct a path, such as
24getcwd(2) and the proc file system /proc/<pid>/cwd, no longer works
25because the point from which the path is constructed has been detached
26from the mount tree.
27
28The actual problem with autofs is that it can't reconnect to existing
29mounts. Immediately one thinks of just adding the ability to remount
30autofs file systems would solve it, but alas, that can't work. This is
31because autofs direct mounts and the implementation of "on demand mount
32and expire" of nested mount trees have the file system mounted directly
33on top of the mount trigger directory dentry.
34
35For example, there are two types of automount maps, direct (in the kernel
36module source you will see a third type called an offset, which is just
37a direct mount in disguise) and indirect.
38
39Here is a master map with direct and indirect map entries:
40
41/- /etc/auto.direct
42/test /etc/auto.indirect
43
44and the corresponding map files:
45
46/etc/auto.direct:
47
48/automount/dparse/g6 budgie:/autofs/export1
49/automount/dparse/g1 shark:/autofs/export1
50and so on.
51
52/etc/auto.indirect:
53
54g1 shark:/autofs/export1
55g6 budgie:/autofs/export1
56and so on.
57
58For the above indirect map an autofs file system is mounted on /test and
59mounts are triggered for each sub-directory key by the inode lookup
60operation. So we see a mount of shark:/autofs/export1 on /test/g1, for
61example.
62
63The way that direct mounts are handled is by making an autofs mount on
64each full path, such as /automount/dparse/g1, and using it as a mount
65trigger. So when we walk on the path we mount shark:/autofs/export1 "on
66top of this mount point". Since these are always directories we can
67use the follow_link inode operation to trigger the mount.
68
69But, each entry in direct and indirect maps can have offsets (making
70them multi-mount map entries).
71
72For example, an indirect mount map entry could also be:
73
74g1 \
75 / shark:/autofs/export5/testing/test \
76 /s1 shark:/autofs/export/testing/test/s1 \
77 /s2 shark:/autofs/export5/testing/test/s2 \
78 /s1/ss1 shark:/autofs/export1 \
79 /s2/ss2 shark:/autofs/export2
80
81and a similarly a direct mount map entry could also be:
82
83/automount/dparse/g1 \
84 / shark:/autofs/export5/testing/test \
85 /s1 shark:/autofs/export/testing/test/s1 \
86 /s2 shark:/autofs/export5/testing/test/s2 \
87 /s1/ss1 shark:/autofs/export2 \
88 /s2/ss2 shark:/autofs/export2
89
90One of the issues with version 4 of autofs was that, when mounting an
91entry with a large number of offsets, possibly with nesting, we needed
92to mount and umount all of the offsets as a single unit. Not really a
93problem, except for people with a large number of offsets in map entries.
94This mechanism is used for the well known "hosts" map and we have seen
95cases (in 2.4) where the available number of mounts are exhausted or
96where the number of privileged ports available is exhausted.
97
98In version 5 we mount only as we go down the tree of offsets and
99similarly for expiring them which resolves the above problem. There is
100somewhat more detail to the implementation but it isn't needed for the
101sake of the problem explanation. The one important detail is that these
102offsets are implemented using the same mechanism as the direct mounts
103above and so the mount points can be covered by a mount.
104
105The current autofs implementation uses an ioctl file descriptor opened
106on the mount point for control operations. The references held by the
107descriptor are accounted for in checks made to determine if a mount is
108in use and is also used to access autofs file system information held
109in the mount super block. So the use of a file handle needs to be
110retained.
111
112
113The Solution
114============
115
116To be able to restart autofs leaving existing direct, indirect and
117offset mounts in place we need to be able to obtain a file handle
118for these potentially covered autofs mount points. Rather than just
119implement an isolated operation it was decided to re-implement the
120existing ioctl interface and add new operations to provide this
121functionality.
122
123In addition, to be able to reconstruct a mount tree that has busy mounts,
124the uid and gid of the last user that triggered the mount needs to be
125available because these can be used as macro substitution variables in
126autofs maps. They are recorded at mount request time and an operation
127has been added to retrieve them.
128
129Since we're re-implementing the control interface, a couple of other
130problems with the existing interface have been addressed. First, when
131a mount or expire operation completes a status is returned to the
132kernel by either a "send ready" or a "send fail" operation. The
133"send fail" operation of the ioctl interface could only ever send
134ENOENT so the re-implementation allows user space to send an actual
135status. Another expensive operation in user space, for those using
136very large maps, is discovering if a mount is present. Usually this
137involves scanning /proc/mounts and since it needs to be done quite
138often it can introduce significant overhead when there are many entries
139in the mount table. An operation to lookup the mount status of a mount
140point dentry (covered or not) has also been added.
141
142Current kernel development policy recommends avoiding the use of the
143ioctl mechanism in favor of systems such as Netlink. An implementation
144using this system was attempted to evaluate its suitability and it was
145found to be inadequate, in this case. The Generic Netlink system was
146used for this as raw Netlink would lead to a significant increase in
147complexity. There's no question that the Generic Netlink system is an
148elegant solution for common case ioctl functions but it's not a complete
149replacement probably because it's primary purpose in life is to be a
150message bus implementation rather than specifically an ioctl replacement.
151While it would be possible to work around this there is one concern
152that lead to the decision to not use it. This is that the autofs
153expire in the daemon has become far to complex because umount
154candidates are enumerated, almost for no other reason than to "count"
155the number of times to call the expire ioctl. This involves scanning
156the mount table which has proved to be a big overhead for users with
157large maps. The best way to improve this is try and get back to the
158way the expire was done long ago. That is, when an expire request is
159issued for a mount (file handle) we should continually call back to
160the daemon until we can't umount any more mounts, then return the
161appropriate status to the daemon. At the moment we just expire one
162mount at a time. A Generic Netlink implementation would exclude this
163possibility for future development due to the requirements of the
164message bus architecture.
165
166
167autofs4 Miscellaneous Device mount control interface
168====================================================
169
170The control interface is opening a device node, typically /dev/autofs.
171
172All the ioctls use a common structure to pass the needed parameter
173information and return operation results:
174
175struct autofs_dev_ioctl {
176 __u32 ver_major;
177 __u32 ver_minor;
178 __u32 size; /* total size of data passed in
179 * including this struct */
180 __s32 ioctlfd; /* automount command fd */
181
182 __u32 arg1; /* Command parameters */
183 __u32 arg2;
184
185 char path[0];
186};
187
188The ioctlfd field is a mount point file descriptor of an autofs mount
189point. It is returned by the open call and is used by all calls except
190the check for whether a given path is a mount point, where it may
191optionally be used to check a specific mount corresponding to a given
192mount point file descriptor, and when requesting the uid and gid of the
193last successful mount on a directory within the autofs file system.
194
195The fields arg1 and arg2 are used to communicate parameters and results of
196calls made as described below.
197
198The path field is used to pass a path where it is needed and the size field
199is used account for the increased structure length when translating the
200structure sent from user space.
201
202This structure can be initialized before setting specific fields by using
203the void function call init_autofs_dev_ioctl(struct autofs_dev_ioctl *).
204
205All of the ioctls perform a copy of this structure from user space to
206kernel space and return -EINVAL if the size parameter is smaller than
207the structure size itself, -ENOMEM if the kernel memory allocation fails
208or -EFAULT if the copy itself fails. Other checks include a version check
209of the compiled in user space version against the module version and a
210mismatch results in a -EINVAL return. If the size field is greater than
211the structure size then a path is assumed to be present and is checked to
212ensure it begins with a "/" and is NULL terminated, otherwise -EINVAL is
213returned. Following these checks, for all ioctl commands except
214AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_VERSION_CMD, AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_OPENMOUNT_CMD and
215AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_CLOSEMOUNT_CMD the ioctlfd is validated and if it is
216not a valid descriptor or doesn't correspond to an autofs mount point
217an error of -EBADF, -ENOTTY or -EINVAL (not an autofs descriptor) is
218returned.
219
220
221The ioctls
222==========
223
224An example of an implementation which uses this interface can be seen
225in autofs version 5.0.4 and later in file lib/dev-ioctl-lib.c of the
226distribution tar available for download from kernel.org in directory
227/pub/linux/daemons/autofs/v5.
228
229The device node ioctl operations implemented by this interface are:
230
231
232AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_VERSION
233------------------------
234
235Get the major and minor version of the autofs4 device ioctl kernel module
236implementation. It requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl as an
237input parameter and sets the version information in the passed in structure.
238It returns 0 on success or the error -EINVAL if a version mismatch is
239detected.
240
241
242AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_PROTOVER_CMD and AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_PROTOSUBVER_CMD
243------------------------------------------------------------------
244
245Get the major and minor version of the autofs4 protocol version understood
246by loaded module. This call requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl
247with the ioctlfd field set to a valid autofs mount point descriptor
248and sets the requested version number in structure field arg1. These
249commands return 0 on success or one of the negative error codes if
250validation fails.
251
252
253AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_OPENMOUNT and AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_CLOSEMOUNT
254----------------------------------------------------------
255
256Obtain and release a file descriptor for an autofs managed mount point
257path. The open call requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl with
258the the path field set and the size field adjusted appropriately as well
259as the arg1 field set to the device number of the autofs mount. The
260device number can be obtained from the mount options shown in
261/proc/mounts. The close call requires an initialized struct
262autofs_dev_ioct with the ioctlfd field set to the descriptor obtained
263from the open call. The release of the file descriptor can also be done
264with close(2) so any open descriptors will also be closed at process exit.
265The close call is included in the implemented operations largely for
266completeness and to provide for a consistent user space implementation.
267
268
269AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_READY_CMD and AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_FAIL_CMD
270--------------------------------------------------------
271
272Return mount and expire result status from user space to the kernel.
273Both of these calls require an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl
274with the ioctlfd field set to the descriptor obtained from the open
275call and the arg1 field set to the wait queue token number, received
276by user space in the foregoing mount or expire request. The arg2 field
277is set to the status to be returned. For the ready call this is always
2780 and for the fail call it is set to the errno of the operation.
279
280
281AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_SETPIPEFD_CMD
282------------------------------
283
284Set the pipe file descriptor used for kernel communication to the daemon.
285Normally this is set at mount time using an option but when reconnecting
286to a existing mount we need to use this to tell the autofs mount about
287the new kernel pipe descriptor. In order to protect mounts against
288incorrectly setting the pipe descriptor we also require that the autofs
289mount be catatonic (see next call).
290
291The call requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl with the
292ioctlfd field set to the descriptor obtained from the open call and
293the arg1 field set to descriptor of the pipe. On success the call
294also sets the process group id used to identify the controlling process
295(eg. the owning automount(8) daemon) to the process group of the caller.
296
297
298AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_CATATONIC_CMD
299------------------------------
300
301Make the autofs mount point catatonic. The autofs mount will no longer
302issue mount requests, the kernel communication pipe descriptor is released
303and any remaining waits in the queue released.
304
305The call requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl with the
306ioctlfd field set to the descriptor obtained from the open call.
307
308
309AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_TIMEOUT_CMD
310----------------------------
311
312Set the expire timeout for mounts withing an autofs mount point.
313
314The call requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl with the
315ioctlfd field set to the descriptor obtained from the open call.
316
317
318AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_REQUESTER_CMD
319------------------------------
320
321Return the uid and gid of the last process to successfully trigger a the
322mount on the given path dentry.
323
324The call requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl with the path
325field set to the mount point in question and the size field adjusted
326appropriately as well as the arg1 field set to the device number of the
327containing autofs mount. Upon return the struct field arg1 contains the
328uid and arg2 the gid.
329
330When reconstructing an autofs mount tree with active mounts we need to
331re-connect to mounts that may have used the original process uid and
332gid (or string variations of them) for mount lookups within the map entry.
333This call provides the ability to obtain this uid and gid so they may be
334used by user space for the mount map lookups.
335
336
337AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_EXPIRE_CMD
338---------------------------
339
340Issue an expire request to the kernel for an autofs mount. Typically
341this ioctl is called until no further expire candidates are found.
342
343The call requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl with the
344ioctlfd field set to the descriptor obtained from the open call. In
345addition an immediate expire, independent of the mount timeout, can be
346requested by setting the arg1 field to 1. If no expire candidates can
347be found the ioctl returns -1 with errno set to EAGAIN.
348
349This call causes the kernel module to check the mount corresponding
350to the given ioctlfd for mounts that can be expired, issues an expire
351request back to the daemon and waits for completion.
352
353AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_ASKUMOUNT_CMD
354------------------------------
355
356Checks if an autofs mount point is in use.
357
358The call requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl with the
359ioctlfd field set to the descriptor obtained from the open call and
360it returns the result in the arg1 field, 1 for busy and 0 otherwise.
361
362
363AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_ISMOUNTPOINT_CMD
364---------------------------------
365
366Check if the given path is a mountpoint.
367
368The call requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl. There are two
369possible variations. Both use the path field set to the path of the mount
370point to check and the size field adjusted appropriately. One uses the
371ioctlfd field to identify a specific mount point to check while the other
372variation uses the path and optionaly arg1 set to an autofs mount type.
373The call returns 1 if this is a mount point and sets arg1 to the device
374number of the mount and field arg2 to the relevant super block magic
375number (described below) or 0 if it isn't a mountpoint. In both cases
376the the device number (as returned by new_encode_dev()) is returned
377in field arg1.
378
379If supplied with a file descriptor we're looking for a specific mount,
380not necessarily at the top of the mounted stack. In this case the path
381the descriptor corresponds to is considered a mountpoint if it is itself
382a mountpoint or contains a mount, such as a multi-mount without a root
383mount. In this case we return 1 if the descriptor corresponds to a mount
384point and and also returns the super magic of the covering mount if there
385is one or 0 if it isn't a mountpoint.
386
387If a path is supplied (and the ioctlfd field is set to -1) then the path
388is looked up and is checked to see if it is the root of a mount. If a
389type is also given we are looking for a particular autofs mount and if
390a match isn't found a fail is returned. If the the located path is the
391root of a mount 1 is returned along with the super magic of the mount
392or 0 otherwise.
393
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext3.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ext3.txt
index b45f3c1b8b43..295f26cd895a 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/ext3.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext3.txt
@@ -193,6 +193,5 @@ kernel source: <file:fs/ext3/>
193programs: http://e2fsprogs.sourceforge.net/ 193programs: http://e2fsprogs.sourceforge.net/
194 http://ext2resize.sourceforge.net 194 http://ext2resize.sourceforge.net
195 195
196useful links: http://www.zip.com.au/~akpm/linux/ext3/ext3-usage.html 196useful links: http://www-106.ibm.com/developerworks/linux/library/l-fs7/
197 http://www-106.ibm.com/developerworks/linux/library/l-fs7/
198 http://www-106.ibm.com/developerworks/linux/library/l-fs8/ 197 http://www-106.ibm.com/developerworks/linux/library/l-fs8/
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt
index 0d5394920a31..eb154ef36c2a 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt
@@ -32,9 +32,9 @@ Mailing list: linux-ext4@vger.kernel.org
32 you will need to merge your changes with the version from e2fsprogs 32 you will need to merge your changes with the version from e2fsprogs
33 1.41.x. 33 1.41.x.
34 34
35 - Create a new filesystem using the ext4dev filesystem type: 35 - Create a new filesystem using the ext4 filesystem type:
36 36
37 # mke2fs -t ext4dev /dev/hda1 37 # mke2fs -t ext4 /dev/hda1
38 38
39 Or configure an existing ext3 filesystem to support extents and set 39 Or configure an existing ext3 filesystem to support extents and set
40 the test_fs flag to indicate that it's ok for an in-development 40 the test_fs flag to indicate that it's ok for an in-development
@@ -47,13 +47,13 @@ Mailing list: linux-ext4@vger.kernel.org
47 47
48 # tune2fs -I 256 /dev/hda1 48 # tune2fs -I 256 /dev/hda1
49 49
50 (Note: we currently do not have tools to convert an ext4dev 50 (Note: we currently do not have tools to convert an ext4
51 filesystem back to ext3; so please do not do try this on production 51 filesystem back to ext3; so please do not do try this on production
52 filesystems.) 52 filesystems.)
53 53
54 - Mounting: 54 - Mounting:
55 55
56 # mount -t ext4dev /dev/hda1 /wherever 56 # mount -t ext4 /dev/hda1 /wherever
57 57
58 - When comparing performance with other filesystems, remember that 58 - When comparing performance with other filesystems, remember that
59 ext3/4 by default offers higher data integrity guarantees than most. 59 ext3/4 by default offers higher data integrity guarantees than most.
@@ -177,6 +177,11 @@ barrier=<0|1(*)> This enables/disables the use of write barriers in
177 your disks are battery-backed in one way or another, 177 your disks are battery-backed in one way or another,
178 disabling barriers may safely improve performance. 178 disabling barriers may safely improve performance.
179 179
180inode_readahead=n This tuning parameter controls the maximum
181 number of inode table blocks that ext4's inode
182 table readahead algorithm will pre-read into
183 the buffer cache. The default value is 32 blocks.
184
180orlov (*) This enables the new Orlov block allocator. It is 185orlov (*) This enables the new Orlov block allocator. It is
181 enabled by default. 186 enabled by default.
182 187
@@ -218,6 +223,11 @@ errors=remount-ro(*) Remount the filesystem read-only on an error.
218errors=continue Keep going on a filesystem error. 223errors=continue Keep going on a filesystem error.
219errors=panic Panic and halt the machine if an error occurs. 224errors=panic Panic and halt the machine if an error occurs.
220 225
226data_err=ignore(*) Just print an error message if an error occurs
227 in a file data buffer in ordered mode.
228data_err=abort Abort the journal if an error occurs in a file
229 data buffer in ordered mode.
230
221grpid Give objects the same group ID as their creator. 231grpid Give objects the same group ID as their creator.
222bsdgroups 232bsdgroups
223 233
@@ -252,6 +262,7 @@ stripe=n Number of filesystem blocks that mballoc will try
252delalloc (*) Deferring block allocation until write-out time. 262delalloc (*) Deferring block allocation until write-out time.
253nodelalloc Disable delayed allocation. Blocks are allocation 263nodelalloc Disable delayed allocation. Blocks are allocation
254 when data is copied from user to page cache. 264 when data is copied from user to page cache.
265
255Data Mode 266Data Mode
256========= 267=========
257There are 3 different data modes: 268There are 3 different data modes:
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/fiemap.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/fiemap.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1e3defcfe50b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/fiemap.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,228 @@
1============
2Fiemap Ioctl
3============
4
5The fiemap ioctl is an efficient method for userspace to get file
6extent mappings. Instead of block-by-block mapping (such as bmap), fiemap
7returns a list of extents.
8
9
10Request Basics
11--------------
12
13A fiemap request is encoded within struct fiemap:
14
15struct fiemap {
16 __u64 fm_start; /* logical offset (inclusive) at
17 * which to start mapping (in) */
18 __u64 fm_length; /* logical length of mapping which
19 * userspace cares about (in) */
20 __u32 fm_flags; /* FIEMAP_FLAG_* flags for request (in/out) */
21 __u32 fm_mapped_extents; /* number of extents that were
22 * mapped (out) */
23 __u32 fm_extent_count; /* size of fm_extents array (in) */
24 __u32 fm_reserved;
25 struct fiemap_extent fm_extents[0]; /* array of mapped extents (out) */
26};
27
28
29fm_start, and fm_length specify the logical range within the file
30which the process would like mappings for. Extents returned mirror
31those on disk - that is, the logical offset of the 1st returned extent
32may start before fm_start, and the range covered by the last returned
33extent may end after fm_length. All offsets and lengths are in bytes.
34
35Certain flags to modify the way in which mappings are looked up can be
36set in fm_flags. If the kernel doesn't understand some particular
37flags, it will return EBADR and the contents of fm_flags will contain
38the set of flags which caused the error. If the kernel is compatible
39with all flags passed, the contents of fm_flags will be unmodified.
40It is up to userspace to determine whether rejection of a particular
41flag is fatal to it's operation. This scheme is intended to allow the
42fiemap interface to grow in the future but without losing
43compatibility with old software.
44
45fm_extent_count specifies the number of elements in the fm_extents[] array
46that can be used to return extents. If fm_extent_count is zero, then the
47fm_extents[] array is ignored (no extents will be returned), and the
48fm_mapped_extents count will hold the number of extents needed in
49fm_extents[] to hold the file's current mapping. Note that there is
50nothing to prevent the file from changing between calls to FIEMAP.
51
52The following flags can be set in fm_flags:
53
54* FIEMAP_FLAG_SYNC
55If this flag is set, the kernel will sync the file before mapping extents.
56
57* FIEMAP_FLAG_XATTR
58If this flag is set, the extents returned will describe the inodes
59extended attribute lookup tree, instead of it's data tree.
60
61
62Extent Mapping
63--------------
64
65Extent information is returned within the embedded fm_extents array
66which userspace must allocate along with the fiemap structure. The
67number of elements in the fiemap_extents[] array should be passed via
68fm_extent_count. The number of extents mapped by kernel will be
69returned via fm_mapped_extents. If the number of fiemap_extents
70allocated is less than would be required to map the requested range,
71the maximum number of extents that can be mapped in the fm_extent[]
72array will be returned and fm_mapped_extents will be equal to
73fm_extent_count. In that case, the last extent in the array will not
74complete the requested range and will not have the FIEMAP_EXTENT_LAST
75flag set (see the next section on extent flags).
76
77Each extent is described by a single fiemap_extent structure as
78returned in fm_extents.
79
80struct fiemap_extent {
81 __u64 fe_logical; /* logical offset in bytes for the start of
82 * the extent */
83 __u64 fe_physical; /* physical offset in bytes for the start
84 * of the extent */
85 __u64 fe_length; /* length in bytes for the extent */
86 __u64 fe_reserved64[2];
87 __u32 fe_flags; /* FIEMAP_EXTENT_* flags for this extent */
88 __u32 fe_reserved[3];
89};
90
91All offsets and lengths are in bytes and mirror those on disk. It is valid
92for an extents logical offset to start before the request or it's logical
93length to extend past the request. Unless FIEMAP_EXTENT_NOT_ALIGNED is
94returned, fe_logical, fe_physical, and fe_length will be aligned to the
95block size of the file system. With the exception of extents flagged as
96FIEMAP_EXTENT_MERGED, adjacent extents will not be merged.
97
98The fe_flags field contains flags which describe the extent returned.
99A special flag, FIEMAP_EXTENT_LAST is always set on the last extent in
100the file so that the process making fiemap calls can determine when no
101more extents are available, without having to call the ioctl again.
102
103Some flags are intentionally vague and will always be set in the
104presence of other more specific flags. This way a program looking for
105a general property does not have to know all existing and future flags
106which imply that property.
107
108For example, if FIEMAP_EXTENT_DATA_INLINE or FIEMAP_EXTENT_DATA_TAIL
109are set, FIEMAP_EXTENT_NOT_ALIGNED will also be set. A program looking
110for inline or tail-packed data can key on the specific flag. Software
111which simply cares not to try operating on non-aligned extents
112however, can just key on FIEMAP_EXTENT_NOT_ALIGNED, and not have to
113worry about all present and future flags which might imply unaligned
114data. Note that the opposite is not true - it would be valid for
115FIEMAP_EXTENT_NOT_ALIGNED to appear alone.
116
117* FIEMAP_EXTENT_LAST
118This is the last extent in the file. A mapping attempt past this
119extent will return nothing.
120
121* FIEMAP_EXTENT_UNKNOWN
122The location of this extent is currently unknown. This may indicate
123the data is stored on an inaccessible volume or that no storage has
124been allocated for the file yet.
125
126* FIEMAP_EXTENT_DELALLOC
127 - This will also set FIEMAP_EXTENT_UNKNOWN.
128Delayed allocation - while there is data for this extent, it's
129physical location has not been allocated yet.
130
131* FIEMAP_EXTENT_ENCODED
132This extent does not consist of plain filesystem blocks but is
133encoded (e.g. encrypted or compressed). Reading the data in this
134extent via I/O to the block device will have undefined results.
135
136Note that it is *always* undefined to try to update the data
137in-place by writing to the indicated location without the
138assistance of the filesystem, or to access the data using the
139information returned by the FIEMAP interface while the filesystem
140is mounted. In other words, user applications may only read the
141extent data via I/O to the block device while the filesystem is
142unmounted, and then only if the FIEMAP_EXTENT_ENCODED flag is
143clear; user applications must not try reading or writing to the
144filesystem via the block device under any other circumstances.
145
146* FIEMAP_EXTENT_DATA_ENCRYPTED
147 - This will also set FIEMAP_EXTENT_ENCODED
148The data in this extent has been encrypted by the file system.
149
150* FIEMAP_EXTENT_NOT_ALIGNED
151Extent offsets and length are not guaranteed to be block aligned.
152
153* FIEMAP_EXTENT_DATA_INLINE
154 This will also set FIEMAP_EXTENT_NOT_ALIGNED
155Data is located within a meta data block.
156
157* FIEMAP_EXTENT_DATA_TAIL
158 This will also set FIEMAP_EXTENT_NOT_ALIGNED
159Data is packed into a block with data from other files.
160
161* FIEMAP_EXTENT_UNWRITTEN
162Unwritten extent - the extent is allocated but it's data has not been
163initialized. This indicates the extent's data will be all zero if read
164through the filesystem but the contents are undefined if read directly from
165the device.
166
167* FIEMAP_EXTENT_MERGED
168This will be set when a file does not support extents, i.e., it uses a block
169based addressing scheme. Since returning an extent for each block back to
170userspace would be highly inefficient, the kernel will try to merge most
171adjacent blocks into 'extents'.
172
173
174VFS -> File System Implementation
175---------------------------------
176
177File systems wishing to support fiemap must implement a ->fiemap callback on
178their inode_operations structure. The fs ->fiemap call is responsible for
179defining it's set of supported fiemap flags, and calling a helper function on
180each discovered extent:
181
182struct inode_operations {
183 ...
184
185 int (*fiemap)(struct inode *, struct fiemap_extent_info *, u64 start,
186 u64 len);
187
188->fiemap is passed struct fiemap_extent_info which describes the
189fiemap request:
190
191struct fiemap_extent_info {
192 unsigned int fi_flags; /* Flags as passed from user */
193 unsigned int fi_extents_mapped; /* Number of mapped extents */
194 unsigned int fi_extents_max; /* Size of fiemap_extent array */
195 struct fiemap_extent *fi_extents_start; /* Start of fiemap_extent array */
196};
197
198It is intended that the file system should not need to access any of this
199structure directly.
200
201
202Flag checking should be done at the beginning of the ->fiemap callback via the
203fiemap_check_flags() helper:
204
205int fiemap_check_flags(struct fiemap_extent_info *fieinfo, u32 fs_flags);
206
207The struct fieinfo should be passed in as recieved from ioctl_fiemap(). The
208set of fiemap flags which the fs understands should be passed via fs_flags. If
209fiemap_check_flags finds invalid user flags, it will place the bad values in
210fieinfo->fi_flags and return -EBADR. If the file system gets -EBADR, from
211fiemap_check_flags(), it should immediately exit, returning that error back to
212ioctl_fiemap().
213
214
215For each extent in the request range, the file system should call
216the helper function, fiemap_fill_next_extent():
217
218int fiemap_fill_next_extent(struct fiemap_extent_info *info, u64 logical,
219 u64 phys, u64 len, u32 flags, u32 dev);
220
221fiemap_fill_next_extent() will use the passed values to populate the
222next free extent in the fm_extents array. 'General' extent flags will
223automatically be set from specific flags on behalf of the calling file
224system so that the userspace API is not broken.
225
226fiemap_fill_next_extent() returns 0 on success, and 1 when the
227user-supplied fm_extents array is full. If an error is encountered
228while copying the extent to user memory, -EFAULT will be returned.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/nfsroot.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/nfsroot.txt
index 31b329172343..68baddf3c3e0 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/nfsroot.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/nfsroot.txt
@@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ They depend on various facilities being available:
1693.1) Booting from a floppy using syslinux 1693.1) Booting from a floppy using syslinux
170 170
171 When building kernels, an easy way to create a boot floppy that uses 171 When building kernels, an easy way to create a boot floppy that uses
172 syslinux is to use the zdisk or bzdisk make targets which use 172 syslinux is to use the zdisk or bzdisk make targets which use zimage
173 and bzimage images respectively. Both targets accept the 173 and bzimage images respectively. Both targets accept the
174 FDARGS parameter which can be used to set the kernel command line. 174 FDARGS parameter which can be used to set the kernel command line.
175 175
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.txt
index c318a8bbb1ef..4340cc825796 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.txt
@@ -76,3 +76,9 @@ localalloc=8(*) Allows custom localalloc size in MB. If the value is too
76 large, the fs will silently revert it to the default. 76 large, the fs will silently revert it to the default.
77 Localalloc is not enabled for local mounts. 77 Localalloc is not enabled for local mounts.
78localflocks This disables cluster aware flock. 78localflocks This disables cluster aware flock.
79inode64 Indicates that Ocfs2 is allowed to create inodes at
80 any location in the filesystem, including those which
81 will result in inode numbers occupying more than 32
82 bits of significance.
83user_xattr (*) Enables Extended User Attributes.
84nouser_xattr Disables Extended User Attributes.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt
index d2f77d959561..c032bf39e8b9 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt
@@ -923,45 +923,44 @@ CPUs.
923The "procs_blocked" line gives the number of processes currently blocked, 923The "procs_blocked" line gives the number of processes currently blocked,
924waiting for I/O to complete. 924waiting for I/O to complete.
925 925
926
9261.9 Ext4 file system parameters 9271.9 Ext4 file system parameters
927------------------------------ 928------------------------------
928Ext4 file system have one directory per partition under /proc/fs/ext4/
929# ls /proc/fs/ext4/hdc/
930group_prealloc max_to_scan mb_groups mb_history min_to_scan order2_req
931stats stream_req
932
933mb_groups:
934This file gives the details of multiblock allocator buddy cache of free blocks
935
936mb_history:
937Multiblock allocation history.
938
939stats:
940This file indicate whether the multiblock allocator should start collecting
941statistics. The statistics are shown during unmount
942
943group_prealloc:
944The multiblock allocator normalize the block allocation request to
945group_prealloc filesystem blocks if we don't have strip value set.
946The stripe value can be specified at mount time or during mke2fs.
947
948max_to_scan:
949How long multiblock allocator can look for a best extent (in found extents)
950 929
951min_to_scan: 930Information about mounted ext4 file systems can be found in
952How long multiblock allocator must look for a best extent 931/proc/fs/ext4. Each mounted filesystem will have a directory in
932/proc/fs/ext4 based on its device name (i.e., /proc/fs/ext4/hdc or
933/proc/fs/ext4/dm-0). The files in each per-device directory are shown
934in Table 1-10, below.
953 935
954order2_req: 936Table 1-10: Files in /proc/fs/ext4/<devname>
955Multiblock allocator use 2^N search using buddies only for requests greater 937..............................................................................
956than or equal to order2_req. The request size is specfied in file system 938 File Content
957blocks. A value of 2 indicate only if the requests are greater than or equal 939 mb_groups details of multiblock allocator buddy cache of free blocks
958to 4 blocks. 940 mb_history multiblock allocation history
941 stats controls whether the multiblock allocator should start
942 collecting statistics, which are shown during the unmount
943 group_prealloc the multiblock allocator will round up allocation
944 requests to a multiple of this tuning parameter if the
945 stripe size is not set in the ext4 superblock
946 max_to_scan The maximum number of extents the multiblock allocator
947 will search to find the best extent
948 min_to_scan The minimum number of extents the multiblock allocator
949 will search to find the best extent
950 order2_req Tuning parameter which controls the minimum size for
951 requests (as a power of 2) where the buddy cache is
952 used
953 stream_req Files which have fewer blocks than this tunable
954 parameter will have their blocks allocated out of a
955 block group specific preallocation pool, so that small
956 files are packed closely together. Each large file
957 will have its blocks allocated out of its own unique
958 preallocation pool.
959inode_readahead Tuning parameter which controls the maximum number of
960 inode table blocks that ext4's inode table readahead
961 algorithm will pre-read into the buffer cache
962..............................................................................
959 963
960stream_req:
961Files smaller than stream_req are served by the stream allocator, whose
962purpose is to pack requests as close each to other as possible to
963produce smooth I/O traffic. Avalue of 16 indicate that file smaller than 16
964filesystem block size will use group based preallocation.
965 964
966------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 965------------------------------------------------------------------------------
967Summary 966Summary
@@ -1344,13 +1343,6 @@ determine whether or not they are still functioning properly.
1344Because the NMI watchdog shares registers with oprofile, by disabling the NMI 1343Because the NMI watchdog shares registers with oprofile, by disabling the NMI
1345watchdog, oprofile may have more registers to utilize. 1344watchdog, oprofile may have more registers to utilize.
1346 1345
1347maps_protect
1348------------
1349
1350Enables/Disables the protection of the per-process proc entries "maps" and
1351"smaps". When enabled, the contents of these files are visible only to
1352readers that are allowed to ptrace() the given process.
1353
1354msgmni 1346msgmni
1355------ 1347------
1356 1348
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ramfs-rootfs-initramfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ramfs-rootfs-initramfs.txt
index 7be232b44ee4..62fe9b1e0890 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/ramfs-rootfs-initramfs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ramfs-rootfs-initramfs.txt
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ User Mode Linux, like so:
263 sleep(999999999); 263 sleep(999999999);
264 } 264 }
265 EOF 265 EOF
266 gcc -static hello2.c -o init 266 gcc -static hello.c -o init
267 echo init | cpio -o -H newc | gzip > test.cpio.gz 267 echo init | cpio -o -H newc | gzip > test.cpio.gz
268 # Testing external initramfs using the initrd loading mechanism. 268 # Testing external initramfs using the initrd loading mechanism.
269 qemu -kernel /boot/vmlinuz -initrd test.cpio.gz /dev/zero 269 qemu -kernel /boot/vmlinuz -initrd test.cpio.gz /dev/zero
diff --git a/Documentation/gpio.txt b/Documentation/gpio.txt
index 18022e249c53..b1b988701247 100644
--- a/Documentation/gpio.txt
+++ b/Documentation/gpio.txt
@@ -240,6 +240,10 @@ signal, or (b) something wrongly believes it's safe to remove drivers
240needed to manage a signal that's in active use. That is, requesting a 240needed to manage a signal that's in active use. That is, requesting a
241GPIO can serve as a kind of lock. 241GPIO can serve as a kind of lock.
242 242
243Some platforms may also use knowledge about what GPIOs are active for
244power management, such as by powering down unused chip sectors and, more
245easily, gating off unused clocks.
246
243These two calls are optional because not not all current Linux platforms 247These two calls are optional because not not all current Linux platforms
244offer such functionality in their GPIO support; a valid implementation 248offer such functionality in their GPIO support; a valid implementation
245could return success for all gpio_request() calls. Unlike the other calls, 249could return success for all gpio_request() calls. Unlike the other calls,
@@ -264,7 +268,7 @@ map between them using calls like:
264 /* map GPIO numbers to IRQ numbers */ 268 /* map GPIO numbers to IRQ numbers */
265 int gpio_to_irq(unsigned gpio); 269 int gpio_to_irq(unsigned gpio);
266 270
267 /* map IRQ numbers to GPIO numbers */ 271 /* map IRQ numbers to GPIO numbers (avoid using this) */
268 int irq_to_gpio(unsigned irq); 272 int irq_to_gpio(unsigned irq);
269 273
270Those return either the corresponding number in the other namespace, or 274Those return either the corresponding number in the other namespace, or
@@ -284,7 +288,8 @@ system wakeup capabilities.
284 288
285Non-error values returned from irq_to_gpio() would most commonly be used 289Non-error values returned from irq_to_gpio() would most commonly be used
286with gpio_get_value(), for example to initialize or update driver state 290with gpio_get_value(), for example to initialize or update driver state
287when the IRQ is edge-triggered. 291when the IRQ is edge-triggered. Note that some platforms don't support
292this reverse mapping, so you should avoid using it.
288 293
289 294
290Emulating Open Drain Signals 295Emulating Open Drain Signals
diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-viapro b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-viapro
index 1405fb69984c..22efedf60c87 100644
--- a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-viapro
+++ b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-viapro
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ Supported adapters:
16 * VIA Technologies, Inc. CX700 16 * VIA Technologies, Inc. CX700
17 Datasheet: available on request and under NDA from VIA 17 Datasheet: available on request and under NDA from VIA
18 18
19 * VIA Technologies, Inc. VX800/VX820
20 Datasheet: available on http://linux.via.com.tw
21
19Authors: 22Authors:
20 Kyösti Mälkki <kmalkki@cc.hut.fi>, 23 Kyösti Mälkki <kmalkki@cc.hut.fi>,
21 Mark D. Studebaker <mdsxyz123@yahoo.com>, 24 Mark D. Studebaker <mdsxyz123@yahoo.com>,
@@ -49,6 +52,7 @@ Your lspci -n listing must show one of these :
49 device 1106:3372 (VT8237S) 52 device 1106:3372 (VT8237S)
50 device 1106:3287 (VT8251) 53 device 1106:3287 (VT8251)
51 device 1106:8324 (CX700) 54 device 1106:8324 (CX700)
55 device 1106:8353 (VX800/VX820)
52 56
53If none of these show up, you should look in the BIOS for settings like 57If none of these show up, you should look in the BIOS for settings like
54enable ACPI / SMBus or even USB. 58enable ACPI / SMBus or even USB.
@@ -57,5 +61,5 @@ Except for the oldest chips (VT82C596A/B, VT82C686A and most probably
57VT8231), this driver supports I2C block transactions. Such transactions 61VT8231), this driver supports I2C block transactions. Such transactions
58are mainly useful to read from and write to EEPROMs. 62are mainly useful to read from and write to EEPROMs.
59 63
60The CX700 additionally appears to support SMBus PEC, although this driver 64The CX700/VX800/VX820 additionally appears to support SMBus PEC, although
61doesn't implement it yet. 65this driver doesn't implement it yet.
diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/dev-interface b/Documentation/i2c/dev-interface
index 9dd79123ddd9..3e742ba25536 100644
--- a/Documentation/i2c/dev-interface
+++ b/Documentation/i2c/dev-interface
@@ -4,6 +4,10 @@ the /dev interface. You need to load module i2c-dev for this.
4 4
5Each registered i2c adapter gets a number, counting from 0. You can 5Each registered i2c adapter gets a number, counting from 0. You can
6examine /sys/class/i2c-dev/ to see what number corresponds to which adapter. 6examine /sys/class/i2c-dev/ to see what number corresponds to which adapter.
7Alternatively, you can run "i2cdetect -l" to obtain a formated list of all
8i2c adapters present on your system at a given time. i2cdetect is part of
9the i2c-tools package.
10
7I2C device files are character device files with major device number 89 11I2C device files are character device files with major device number 89
8and a minor device number corresponding to the number assigned as 12and a minor device number corresponding to the number assigned as
9explained above. They should be called "i2c-%d" (i2c-0, i2c-1, ..., 13explained above. They should be called "i2c-%d" (i2c-0, i2c-1, ...,
@@ -17,30 +21,34 @@ So let's say you want to access an i2c adapter from a C program. The
17first thing to do is "#include <linux/i2c-dev.h>". Please note that 21first thing to do is "#include <linux/i2c-dev.h>". Please note that
18there are two files named "i2c-dev.h" out there, one is distributed 22there are two files named "i2c-dev.h" out there, one is distributed
19with the Linux kernel and is meant to be included from kernel 23with the Linux kernel and is meant to be included from kernel
20driver code, the other one is distributed with lm_sensors and is 24driver code, the other one is distributed with i2c-tools and is
21meant to be included from user-space programs. You obviously want 25meant to be included from user-space programs. You obviously want
22the second one here. 26the second one here.
23 27
24Now, you have to decide which adapter you want to access. You should 28Now, you have to decide which adapter you want to access. You should
25inspect /sys/class/i2c-dev/ to decide this. Adapter numbers are assigned 29inspect /sys/class/i2c-dev/ or run "i2cdetect -l" to decide this.
26somewhat dynamically, so you can not even assume /dev/i2c-0 is the 30Adapter numbers are assigned somewhat dynamically, so you can not
27first adapter. 31assume much about them. They can even change from one boot to the next.
28 32
29Next thing, open the device file, as follows: 33Next thing, open the device file, as follows:
34
30 int file; 35 int file;
31 int adapter_nr = 2; /* probably dynamically determined */ 36 int adapter_nr = 2; /* probably dynamically determined */
32 char filename[20]; 37 char filename[20];
33 38
34 sprintf(filename,"/dev/i2c-%d",adapter_nr); 39 snprintf(filename, 19, "/dev/i2c-%d", adapter_nr);
35 if ((file = open(filename,O_RDWR)) < 0) { 40 file = open(filename, O_RDWR);
41 if (file < 0) {
36 /* ERROR HANDLING; you can check errno to see what went wrong */ 42 /* ERROR HANDLING; you can check errno to see what went wrong */
37 exit(1); 43 exit(1);
38 } 44 }
39 45
40When you have opened the device, you must specify with what device 46When you have opened the device, you must specify with what device
41address you want to communicate: 47address you want to communicate:
48
42 int addr = 0x40; /* The I2C address */ 49 int addr = 0x40; /* The I2C address */
43 if (ioctl(file,I2C_SLAVE,addr) < 0) { 50
51 if (ioctl(file, I2C_SLAVE, addr) < 0) {
44 /* ERROR HANDLING; you can check errno to see what went wrong */ 52 /* ERROR HANDLING; you can check errno to see what went wrong */
45 exit(1); 53 exit(1);
46 } 54 }
@@ -48,31 +56,41 @@ address you want to communicate:
48Well, you are all set up now. You can now use SMBus commands or plain 56Well, you are all set up now. You can now use SMBus commands or plain
49I2C to communicate with your device. SMBus commands are preferred if 57I2C to communicate with your device. SMBus commands are preferred if
50the device supports them. Both are illustrated below. 58the device supports them. Both are illustrated below.
59
51 __u8 register = 0x10; /* Device register to access */ 60 __u8 register = 0x10; /* Device register to access */
52 __s32 res; 61 __s32 res;
53 char buf[10]; 62 char buf[10];
63
54 /* Using SMBus commands */ 64 /* Using SMBus commands */
55 res = i2c_smbus_read_word_data(file,register); 65 res = i2c_smbus_read_word_data(file, register);
56 if (res < 0) { 66 if (res < 0) {
57 /* ERROR HANDLING: i2c transaction failed */ 67 /* ERROR HANDLING: i2c transaction failed */
58 } else { 68 } else {
59 /* res contains the read word */ 69 /* res contains the read word */
60 } 70 }
71
61 /* Using I2C Write, equivalent of 72 /* Using I2C Write, equivalent of
62 i2c_smbus_write_word_data(file,register,0x6543) */ 73 i2c_smbus_write_word_data(file, register, 0x6543) */
63 buf[0] = register; 74 buf[0] = register;
64 buf[1] = 0x43; 75 buf[1] = 0x43;
65 buf[2] = 0x65; 76 buf[2] = 0x65;
66 if ( write(file,buf,3) != 3) { 77 if (write(file, buf, 3) ! =3) {
67 /* ERROR HANDLING: i2c transaction failed */ 78 /* ERROR HANDLING: i2c transaction failed */
68 } 79 }
80
69 /* Using I2C Read, equivalent of i2c_smbus_read_byte(file) */ 81 /* Using I2C Read, equivalent of i2c_smbus_read_byte(file) */
70 if (read(file,buf,1) != 1) { 82 if (read(file, buf, 1) != 1) {
71 /* ERROR HANDLING: i2c transaction failed */ 83 /* ERROR HANDLING: i2c transaction failed */
72 } else { 84 } else {
73 /* buf[0] contains the read byte */ 85 /* buf[0] contains the read byte */
74 } 86 }
75 87
88Note that only a subset of the I2C and SMBus protocols can be achieved by
89the means of read() and write() calls. In particular, so-called combined
90transactions (mixing read and write messages in the same transaction)
91aren't supported. For this reason, this interface is almost never used by
92user-space programs.
93
76IMPORTANT: because of the use of inline functions, you *have* to use 94IMPORTANT: because of the use of inline functions, you *have* to use
77'-O' or some variation when you compile your program! 95'-O' or some variation when you compile your program!
78 96
@@ -80,31 +98,29 @@ IMPORTANT: because of the use of inline functions, you *have* to use
80Full interface description 98Full interface description
81========================== 99==========================
82 100
83The following IOCTLs are defined and fully supported 101The following IOCTLs are defined:
84(see also i2c-dev.h):
85 102
86ioctl(file,I2C_SLAVE,long addr) 103ioctl(file, I2C_SLAVE, long addr)
87 Change slave address. The address is passed in the 7 lower bits of the 104 Change slave address. The address is passed in the 7 lower bits of the
88 argument (except for 10 bit addresses, passed in the 10 lower bits in this 105 argument (except for 10 bit addresses, passed in the 10 lower bits in this
89 case). 106 case).
90 107
91ioctl(file,I2C_TENBIT,long select) 108ioctl(file, I2C_TENBIT, long select)
92 Selects ten bit addresses if select not equals 0, selects normal 7 bit 109 Selects ten bit addresses if select not equals 0, selects normal 7 bit
93 addresses if select equals 0. Default 0. This request is only valid 110 addresses if select equals 0. Default 0. This request is only valid
94 if the adapter has I2C_FUNC_10BIT_ADDR. 111 if the adapter has I2C_FUNC_10BIT_ADDR.
95 112
96ioctl(file,I2C_PEC,long select) 113ioctl(file, I2C_PEC, long select)
97 Selects SMBus PEC (packet error checking) generation and verification 114 Selects SMBus PEC (packet error checking) generation and verification
98 if select not equals 0, disables if select equals 0. Default 0. 115 if select not equals 0, disables if select equals 0. Default 0.
99 Used only for SMBus transactions. This request only has an effect if the 116 Used only for SMBus transactions. This request only has an effect if the
100 the adapter has I2C_FUNC_SMBUS_PEC; it is still safe if not, it just 117 the adapter has I2C_FUNC_SMBUS_PEC; it is still safe if not, it just
101 doesn't have any effect. 118 doesn't have any effect.
102 119
103ioctl(file,I2C_FUNCS,unsigned long *funcs) 120ioctl(file, I2C_FUNCS, unsigned long *funcs)
104 Gets the adapter functionality and puts it in *funcs. 121 Gets the adapter functionality and puts it in *funcs.
105 122
106ioctl(file,I2C_RDWR,struct i2c_rdwr_ioctl_data *msgset) 123ioctl(file, I2C_RDWR, struct i2c_rdwr_ioctl_data *msgset)
107
108 Do combined read/write transaction without stop in between. 124 Do combined read/write transaction without stop in between.
109 Only valid if the adapter has I2C_FUNC_I2C. The argument is 125 Only valid if the adapter has I2C_FUNC_I2C. The argument is
110 a pointer to a 126 a pointer to a
@@ -120,10 +136,9 @@ ioctl(file,I2C_RDWR,struct i2c_rdwr_ioctl_data *msgset)
120 The slave address and whether to use ten bit address mode has to be 136 The slave address and whether to use ten bit address mode has to be
121 set in each message, overriding the values set with the above ioctl's. 137 set in each message, overriding the values set with the above ioctl's.
122 138
123 139ioctl(file, I2C_SMBUS, struct i2c_smbus_ioctl_data *args)
124Other values are NOT supported at this moment, except for I2C_SMBUS, 140 Not meant to be called directly; instead, use the access functions
125which you should never directly call; instead, use the access functions 141 below.
126below.
127 142
128You can do plain i2c transactions by using read(2) and write(2) calls. 143You can do plain i2c transactions by using read(2) and write(2) calls.
129You do not need to pass the address byte; instead, set it through 144You do not need to pass the address byte; instead, set it through
@@ -148,7 +163,52 @@ what happened. The 'write' transactions return 0 on success; the
148returns the number of values read. The block buffers need not be longer 163returns the number of values read. The block buffers need not be longer
149than 32 bytes. 164than 32 bytes.
150 165
151The above functions are all macros, that resolve to calls to the 166The above functions are all inline functions, that resolve to calls to
152i2c_smbus_access function, that on its turn calls a specific ioctl 167the i2c_smbus_access function, that on its turn calls a specific ioctl
153with the data in a specific format. Read the source code if you 168with the data in a specific format. Read the source code if you
154want to know what happens behind the screens. 169want to know what happens behind the screens.
170
171
172Implementation details
173======================
174
175For the interested, here's the code flow which happens inside the kernel
176when you use the /dev interface to I2C:
177
1781* Your program opens /dev/i2c-N and calls ioctl() on it, as described in
179section "C example" above.
180
1812* These open() and ioctl() calls are handled by the i2c-dev kernel
182driver: see i2c-dev.c:i2cdev_open() and i2c-dev.c:i2cdev_ioctl(),
183respectively. You can think of i2c-dev as a generic I2C chip driver
184that can be programmed from user-space.
185
1863* Some ioctl() calls are for administrative tasks and are handled by
187i2c-dev directly. Examples include I2C_SLAVE (set the address of the
188device you want to access) and I2C_PEC (enable or disable SMBus error
189checking on future transactions.)
190
1914* Other ioctl() calls are converted to in-kernel function calls by
192i2c-dev. Examples include I2C_FUNCS, which queries the I2C adapter
193functionality using i2c.h:i2c_get_functionality(), and I2C_SMBUS, which
194performs an SMBus transaction using i2c-core.c:i2c_smbus_xfer().
195
196The i2c-dev driver is responsible for checking all the parameters that
197come from user-space for validity. After this point, there is no
198difference between these calls that came from user-space through i2c-dev
199and calls that would have been performed by kernel I2C chip drivers
200directly. This means that I2C bus drivers don't need to implement
201anything special to support access from user-space.
202
2035* These i2c-core.c/i2c.h functions are wrappers to the actual
204implementation of your I2C bus driver. Each adapter must declare
205callback functions implementing these standard calls.
206i2c.h:i2c_get_functionality() calls i2c_adapter.algo->functionality(),
207while i2c-core.c:i2c_smbus_xfer() calls either
208adapter.algo->smbus_xfer() if it is implemented, or if not,
209i2c-core.c:i2c_smbus_xfer_emulated() which in turn calls
210i2c_adapter.algo->master_xfer().
211
212After your I2C bus driver has processed these requests, execution runs
213up the call chain, with almost no processing done, except by i2c-dev to
214package the returned data, if any, in suitable format for the ioctl.
diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/smbus-protocol b/Documentation/i2c/smbus-protocol
index 24bfb65da17d..9df47441f0e7 100644
--- a/Documentation/i2c/smbus-protocol
+++ b/Documentation/i2c/smbus-protocol
@@ -109,8 +109,8 @@ specified through the Comm byte.
109S Addr Wr [A] Comm [A] DataLow [A] DataHigh [A] P 109S Addr Wr [A] Comm [A] DataLow [A] DataHigh [A] P
110 110
111 111
112SMBus Process Call 112SMBus Process Call: i2c_smbus_process_call()
113================== 113=============================================
114 114
115This command selects a device register (through the Comm byte), sends 115This command selects a device register (through the Comm byte), sends
11616 bits of data to it, and reads 16 bits of data in return. 11616 bits of data to it, and reads 16 bits of data in return.
diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/writing-clients b/Documentation/i2c/writing-clients
index 6b61b3a2e90b..d73ee117a8ca 100644
--- a/Documentation/i2c/writing-clients
+++ b/Documentation/i2c/writing-clients
@@ -606,6 +606,8 @@ SMBus communication
606 extern s32 i2c_smbus_read_word_data(struct i2c_client * client, u8 command); 606 extern s32 i2c_smbus_read_word_data(struct i2c_client * client, u8 command);
607 extern s32 i2c_smbus_write_word_data(struct i2c_client * client, 607 extern s32 i2c_smbus_write_word_data(struct i2c_client * client,
608 u8 command, u16 value); 608 u8 command, u16 value);
609 extern s32 i2c_smbus_process_call(struct i2c_client *client,
610 u8 command, u16 value);
609 extern s32 i2c_smbus_read_block_data(struct i2c_client * client, 611 extern s32 i2c_smbus_read_block_data(struct i2c_client * client,
610 u8 command, u8 *values); 612 u8 command, u8 *values);
611 extern s32 i2c_smbus_write_block_data(struct i2c_client * client, 613 extern s32 i2c_smbus_write_block_data(struct i2c_client * client,
@@ -621,8 +623,6 @@ These ones were removed from i2c-core because they had no users, but could
621be added back later if needed: 623be added back later if needed:
622 624
623 extern s32 i2c_smbus_write_quick(struct i2c_client * client, u8 value); 625 extern s32 i2c_smbus_write_quick(struct i2c_client * client, u8 value);
624 extern s32 i2c_smbus_process_call(struct i2c_client * client,
625 u8 command, u16 value);
626 extern s32 i2c_smbus_block_process_call(struct i2c_client *client, 626 extern s32 i2c_smbus_block_process_call(struct i2c_client *client,
627 u8 command, u8 length, 627 u8 command, u8 length,
628 u8 *values) 628 u8 *values)
diff --git a/Documentation/ia64/kvm.txt b/Documentation/ia64/kvm.txt
index 914d07f49268..84f7cb3d5bec 100644
--- a/Documentation/ia64/kvm.txt
+++ b/Documentation/ia64/kvm.txt
@@ -1,7 +1,8 @@
1Currently, kvm module in EXPERIMENTAL stage on IA64. This means that 1Currently, kvm module is in EXPERIMENTAL stage on IA64. This means that
2interfaces are not stable enough to use. So, plase had better don't run 2interfaces are not stable enough to use. So, please don't run critical
3critical applications in virtual machine. We will try our best to make it 3applications in virtual machine.
4strong in future versions! 4We will try our best to improve it in future versions!
5
5 Guide: How to boot up guests on kvm/ia64 6 Guide: How to boot up guests on kvm/ia64
6 7
7This guide is to describe how to enable kvm support for IA-64 systems. 8This guide is to describe how to enable kvm support for IA-64 systems.
diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt b/Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt
index 0bd32748a467..c6841eee9598 100644
--- a/Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt
+++ b/Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt
@@ -168,10 +168,10 @@ if ($#ARGV < 0) {
168mkdir $ARGV[0],0777; 168mkdir $ARGV[0],0777;
169$state = 0; 169$state = 0;
170while (<STDIN>) { 170while (<STDIN>) {
171 if (/^\.TH \"[^\"]*\" 4 \"([^\"]*)\"/) { 171 if (/^\.TH \"[^\"]*\" 9 \"([^\"]*)\"/) {
172 if ($state == 1) { close OUT } 172 if ($state == 1) { close OUT }
173 $state = 1; 173 $state = 1;
174 $fn = "$ARGV[0]/$1.4"; 174 $fn = "$ARGV[0]/$1.9";
175 print STDERR "Creating $fn\n"; 175 print STDERR "Creating $fn\n";
176 open OUT, ">$fn" or die "can't open $fn: $!\n"; 176 open OUT, ">$fn" or die "can't open $fn: $!\n";
177 print OUT $_; 177 print OUT $_;
diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt
index 1150444a21ab..82c561f3abbd 100644
--- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt
+++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt
@@ -284,6 +284,11 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
284 isolate - enable device isolation (each device, as far 284 isolate - enable device isolation (each device, as far
285 as possible, will get its own protection 285 as possible, will get its own protection
286 domain) 286 domain)
287 fullflush - enable flushing of IO/TLB entries when
288 they are unmapped. Otherwise they are
289 flushed before they will be reused, which
290 is a lot of faster
291
287 amd_iommu_size= [HW,X86-64] 292 amd_iommu_size= [HW,X86-64]
288 Define the size of the aperture for the AMD IOMMU 293 Define the size of the aperture for the AMD IOMMU
289 driver. Possible values are: 294 driver. Possible values are:
@@ -463,12 +468,6 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
463 Range: 0 - 8192 468 Range: 0 - 8192
464 Default: 64 469 Default: 64
465 470
466 disable_8254_timer
467 enable_8254_timer
468 [IA32/X86_64] Disable/Enable interrupt 0 timer routing
469 over the 8254 in addition to over the IO-APIC. The
470 kernel tries to set a sensible default.
471
472 hpet= [X86-32,HPET] option to control HPET usage 471 hpet= [X86-32,HPET] option to control HPET usage
473 Format: { enable (default) | disable | force } 472 Format: { enable (default) | disable | force }
474 disable: disable HPET and use PIT instead 473 disable: disable HPET and use PIT instead
@@ -659,11 +658,12 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
659 earlyprintk= [X86-32,X86-64,SH,BLACKFIN] 658 earlyprintk= [X86-32,X86-64,SH,BLACKFIN]
660 earlyprintk=vga 659 earlyprintk=vga
661 earlyprintk=serial[,ttySn[,baudrate]] 660 earlyprintk=serial[,ttySn[,baudrate]]
661 earlyprintk=dbgp
662 662
663 Append ",keep" to not disable it when the real console 663 Append ",keep" to not disable it when the real console
664 takes over. 664 takes over.
665 665
666 Only vga or serial at a time, not both. 666 Only vga or serial or usb debug port at a time.
667 667
668 Currently only ttyS0 and ttyS1 are supported. 668 Currently only ttyS0 and ttyS1 are supported.
669 669
@@ -796,6 +796,7 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
796 Defaults to the default architecture's huge page size 796 Defaults to the default architecture's huge page size
797 if not specified. 797 if not specified.
798 798
799 i8042.debug [HW] Toggle i8042 debug mode
799 i8042.direct [HW] Put keyboard port into non-translated mode 800 i8042.direct [HW] Put keyboard port into non-translated mode
800 i8042.dumbkbd [HW] Pretend that controller can only read data from 801 i8042.dumbkbd [HW] Pretend that controller can only read data from
801 keyboard and cannot control its state 802 keyboard and cannot control its state
@@ -1020,6 +1021,10 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
1020 (only serial suported for now) 1021 (only serial suported for now)
1021 Format: <serial_device>[,baud] 1022 Format: <serial_device>[,baud]
1022 1023
1024 kmac= [MIPS] korina ethernet MAC address.
1025 Configure the RouterBoard 532 series on-chip
1026 Ethernet adapter MAC address.
1027
1023 l2cr= [PPC] 1028 l2cr= [PPC]
1024 1029
1025 l3cr= [PPC] 1030 l3cr= [PPC]
@@ -1228,6 +1233,29 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
1228 or 1233 or
1229 memmap=0x10000$0x18690000 1234 memmap=0x10000$0x18690000
1230 1235
1236 memory_corruption_check=0/1 [X86]
1237 Some BIOSes seem to corrupt the first 64k of
1238 memory when doing things like suspend/resume.
1239 Setting this option will scan the memory
1240 looking for corruption. Enabling this will
1241 both detect corruption and prevent the kernel
1242 from using the memory being corrupted.
1243 However, its intended as a diagnostic tool; if
1244 repeatable BIOS-originated corruption always
1245 affects the same memory, you can use memmap=
1246 to prevent the kernel from using that memory.
1247
1248 memory_corruption_check_size=size [X86]
1249 By default it checks for corruption in the low
1250 64k, making this memory unavailable for normal
1251 use. Use this parameter to scan for
1252 corruption in more or less memory.
1253
1254 memory_corruption_check_period=seconds [X86]
1255 By default it checks for corruption every 60
1256 seconds. Use this parameter to check at some
1257 other rate. 0 disables periodic checking.
1258
1231 memtest= [KNL,X86] Enable memtest 1259 memtest= [KNL,X86] Enable memtest
1232 Format: <integer> 1260 Format: <integer>
1233 range: 0,4 : pattern number 1261 range: 0,4 : pattern number
@@ -1425,6 +1453,12 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
1425 1453
1426 nolapic_timer [X86-32,APIC] Do not use the local APIC timer. 1454 nolapic_timer [X86-32,APIC] Do not use the local APIC timer.
1427 1455
1456 nox2apic [X86-64,APIC] Do not enable x2APIC mode.
1457
1458 x2apic_phys [X86-64,APIC] Use x2apic physical mode instead of
1459 default x2apic cluster mode on platforms
1460 supporting x2apic.
1461
1428 noltlbs [PPC] Do not use large page/tlb entries for kernel 1462 noltlbs [PPC] Do not use large page/tlb entries for kernel
1429 lowmem mapping on PPC40x. 1463 lowmem mapping on PPC40x.
1430 1464
@@ -1882,6 +1916,12 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
1882 shapers= [NET] 1916 shapers= [NET]
1883 Maximal number of shapers. 1917 Maximal number of shapers.
1884 1918
1919 show_msr= [x86] show boot-time MSR settings
1920 Format: { <integer> }
1921 Show boot-time (BIOS-initialized) MSR settings.
1922 The parameter means the number of CPUs to show,
1923 for example 1 means boot CPU only.
1924
1885 sim710= [SCSI,HW] 1925 sim710= [SCSI,HW]
1886 See header of drivers/scsi/sim710.c. 1926 See header of drivers/scsi/sim710.c.
1887 1927
diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/disk-shock-protection.txt b/Documentation/laptops/disk-shock-protection.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0e6ba2663834
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/laptops/disk-shock-protection.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,149 @@
1Hard disk shock protection
2==========================
3
4Author: Elias Oltmanns <eo@nebensachen.de>
5Last modified: 2008-10-03
6
7
80. Contents
9-----------
10
111. Intro
122. The interface
133. References
144. CREDITS
15
16
171. Intro
18--------
19
20ATA/ATAPI-7 specifies the IDLE IMMEDIATE command with unload feature.
21Issuing this command should cause the drive to switch to idle mode and
22unload disk heads. This feature is being used in modern laptops in
23conjunction with accelerometers and appropriate software to implement
24a shock protection facility. The idea is to stop all I/O operations on
25the internal hard drive and park its heads on the ramp when critical
26situations are anticipated. The desire to have such a feature
27available on GNU/Linux systems has been the original motivation to
28implement a generic disk head parking interface in the Linux kernel.
29Please note, however, that other components have to be set up on your
30system in order to get disk shock protection working (see
31section 3. References below for pointers to more information about
32that).
33
34
352. The interface
36----------------
37
38For each ATA device, the kernel exports the file
39block/*/device/unload_heads in sysfs (here assumed to be mounted under
40/sys). Access to /sys/block/*/device/unload_heads is denied with
41-EOPNOTSUPP if the device does not support the unload feature.
42Otherwise, writing an integer value to this file will take the heads
43of the respective drive off the platter and block all I/O operations
44for the specified number of milliseconds. When the timeout expires and
45no further disk head park request has been issued in the meantime,
46normal operation will be resumed. The maximal value accepted for a
47timeout is 30000 milliseconds. Exceeding this limit will return
48-EOVERFLOW, but heads will be parked anyway and the timeout will be
49set to 30 seconds. However, you can always change a timeout to any
50value between 0 and 30000 by issuing a subsequent head park request
51before the timeout of the previous one has expired. In particular, the
52total timeout can exceed 30 seconds and, more importantly, you can
53cancel a previously set timeout and resume normal operation
54immediately by specifying a timeout of 0. Values below -2 are rejected
55with -EINVAL (see below for the special meaning of -1 and -2). If the
56timeout specified for a recent head park request has not yet expired,
57reading from /sys/block/*/device/unload_heads will report the number
58of milliseconds remaining until normal operation will be resumed;
59otherwise, reading the unload_heads attribute will return 0.
60
61For example, do the following in order to park the heads of drive
62/dev/sda and stop all I/O operations for five seconds:
63
64# echo 5000 > /sys/block/sda/device/unload_heads
65
66A simple
67
68# cat /sys/block/sda/device/unload_heads
69
70will show you how many milliseconds are left before normal operation
71will be resumed.
72
73A word of caution: The fact that the interface operates on a basis of
74milliseconds may raise expectations that cannot be satisfied in
75reality. In fact, the ATA specs clearly state that the time for an
76unload operation to complete is vendor specific. The hint in ATA-7
77that this will typically be within 500 milliseconds apparently has
78been dropped in ATA-8.
79
80There is a technical detail of this implementation that may cause some
81confusion and should be discussed here. When a head park request has
82been issued to a device successfully, all I/O operations on the
83controller port this device is attached to will be deferred. That is
84to say, any other device that may be connected to the same port will
85be affected too. The only exception is that a subsequent head unload
86request to that other device will be executed immediately. Further
87operations on that port will be deferred until the timeout specified
88for either device on the port has expired. As far as PATA (old style
89IDE) configurations are concerned, there can only be two devices
90attached to any single port. In SATA world we have port multipliers
91which means that a user-issued head parking request to one device may
92actually result in stopping I/O to a whole bunch of devices. However,
93since this feature is supposed to be used on laptops and does not seem
94to be very useful in any other environment, there will be mostly one
95device per port. Even if the CD/DVD writer happens to be connected to
96the same port as the hard drive, it generally *should* recover just
97fine from the occasional buffer under-run incurred by a head park
98request to the HD. Actually, when you are using an ide driver rather
99than its libata counterpart (i.e. your disk is called /dev/hda
100instead of /dev/sda), then parking the heads of one drive (drive X)
101will generally not affect the mode of operation of another drive
102(drive Y) on the same port as described above. It is only when a port
103reset is required to recover from an exception on drive Y that further
104I/O operations on that drive (and the reset itself) will be delayed
105until drive X is no longer in the parked state.
106
107Finally, there are some hard drives that only comply with an earlier
108version of the ATA standard than ATA-7, but do support the unload
109feature nonetheless. Unfortunately, there is no safe way Linux can
110detect these devices, so you won't be able to write to the
111unload_heads attribute. If you know that your device really does
112support the unload feature (for instance, because the vendor of your
113laptop or the hard drive itself told you so), then you can tell the
114kernel to enable the usage of this feature for that drive by writing
115the special value -1 to the unload_heads attribute:
116
117# echo -1 > /sys/block/sda/device/unload_heads
118
119will enable the feature for /dev/sda, and giving -2 instead of -1 will
120disable it again.
121
122
1233. References
124-------------
125
126There are several laptops from different vendors featuring shock
127protection capabilities. As manufacturers have refused to support open
128source development of the required software components so far, Linux
129support for shock protection varies considerably between different
130hardware implementations. Ideally, this section should contain a list
131of pointers at different projects aiming at an implementation of shock
132protection on different systems. Unfortunately, I only know of a
133single project which, although still considered experimental, is fit
134for use. Please feel free to add projects that have been the victims
135of my ignorance.
136
137- http://www.thinkwiki.org/wiki/HDAPS
138 See this page for information about Linux support of the hard disk
139 active protection system as implemented in IBM/Lenovo Thinkpads.
140
141
1424. CREDITS
143----------
144
145This implementation of disk head parking has been inspired by a patch
146originally published by Jon Escombe <lists@dresco.co.uk>. My efforts
147to develop an implementation of this feature that is fit to be merged
148into mainline have been aided by various kernel developers, in
149particular by Tejun Heo and Bartlomiej Zolnierkiewicz.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qlge b/Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qlge
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..123b6edd7f18
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qlge
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
1Copyright (c) 2003-2008 QLogic Corporation
2QLogic Linux Networking HBA Driver
3
4This program includes a device driver for Linux 2.6 that may be
5distributed with QLogic hardware specific firmware binary file.
6You may modify and redistribute the device driver code under the
7GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software
8Foundation (version 2 or a later version).
9
10You may redistribute the hardware specific firmware binary file
11under the following terms:
12
13 1. Redistribution of source code (only if applicable),
14 must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
15 conditions and the following disclaimer.
16
17 2. Redistribution in binary form must reproduce the above
18 copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
19 following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
20 materials provided with the distribution.
21
22 3. The name of QLogic Corporation may not be used to
23 endorse or promote products derived from this software
24 without specific prior written permission
25
26REGARDLESS OF WHAT LICENSING MECHANISM IS USED OR APPLICABLE,
27THIS PROGRAM IS PROVIDED BY QLOGIC CORPORATION "AS IS'' AND ANY
28EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
29IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
30PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR
31BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
32EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
33TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
34DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
35ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
36OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
37OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
38POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
39
40USER ACKNOWLEDGES AND AGREES THAT USE OF THIS PROGRAM WILL NOT
41CREATE OR GIVE GROUNDS FOR A LICENSE BY IMPLICATION, ESTOPPEL, OR
42OTHERWISE IN ANY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS (PATENT, COPYRIGHT,
43TRADE SECRET, MASK WORK, OR OTHER PROPRIETARY RIGHT) EMBODIED IN
44ANY OTHER QLOGIC HARDWARE OR SOFTWARE EITHER SOLELY OR IN
45COMBINATION WITH THIS PROGRAM.
46
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/can.txt b/Documentation/networking/can.txt
index 297ba7b1ccaf..2035bc4932f2 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/can.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/can.txt
@@ -35,8 +35,9 @@ This file contains
35 6.1 general settings 35 6.1 general settings
36 6.2 local loopback of sent frames 36 6.2 local loopback of sent frames
37 6.3 CAN controller hardware filters 37 6.3 CAN controller hardware filters
38 6.4 currently supported CAN hardware 38 6.4 The virtual CAN driver (vcan)
39 6.5 todo 39 6.5 currently supported CAN hardware
40 6.6 todo
40 41
41 7 Credits 42 7 Credits
42 43
@@ -584,7 +585,42 @@ solution for a couple of reasons:
584 @133MHz with four SJA1000 CAN controllers from 2002 under heavy bus 585 @133MHz with four SJA1000 CAN controllers from 2002 under heavy bus
585 load without any problems ... 586 load without any problems ...
586 587
587 6.4 currently supported CAN hardware (September 2007) 588 6.4 The virtual CAN driver (vcan)
589
590 Similar to the network loopback devices, vcan offers a virtual local
591 CAN interface. A full qualified address on CAN consists of
592
593 - a unique CAN Identifier (CAN ID)
594 - the CAN bus this CAN ID is transmitted on (e.g. can0)
595
596 so in common use cases more than one virtual CAN interface is needed.
597
598 The virtual CAN interfaces allow the transmission and reception of CAN
599 frames without real CAN controller hardware. Virtual CAN network
600 devices are usually named 'vcanX', like vcan0 vcan1 vcan2 ...
601 When compiled as a module the virtual CAN driver module is called vcan.ko
602
603 Since Linux Kernel version 2.6.24 the vcan driver supports the Kernel
604 netlink interface to create vcan network devices. The creation and
605 removal of vcan network devices can be managed with the ip(8) tool:
606
607 - Create a virtual CAN network interface:
608 ip link add type vcan
609
610 - Create a virtual CAN network interface with a specific name 'vcan42':
611 ip link add dev vcan42 type vcan
612
613 - Remove a (virtual CAN) network interface 'vcan42':
614 ip link del vcan42
615
616 The tool 'vcan' from the SocketCAN SVN repository on BerliOS is obsolete.
617
618 Virtual CAN network device creation in older Kernels:
619 In Linux Kernel versions < 2.6.24 the vcan driver creates 4 vcan
620 netdevices at module load time by default. This value can be changed
621 with the module parameter 'numdev'. E.g. 'modprobe vcan numdev=8'
622
623 6.5 currently supported CAN hardware
588 624
589 On the project website http://developer.berlios.de/projects/socketcan 625 On the project website http://developer.berlios.de/projects/socketcan
590 there are different drivers available: 626 there are different drivers available:
@@ -603,7 +639,7 @@ solution for a couple of reasons:
603 639
604 Please check the Mailing Lists on the berlios OSS project website. 640 Please check the Mailing Lists on the berlios OSS project website.
605 641
606 6.5 todo (September 2007) 642 6.6 todo
607 643
608 The configuration interface for CAN network drivers is still an open 644 The configuration interface for CAN network drivers is still an open
609 issue that has not been finalized in the socketcan project. Also the 645 issue that has not been finalized in the socketcan project. Also the
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/cs89x0.txt b/Documentation/networking/cs89x0.txt
index 6387d3decf85..c725d33b316f 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/cs89x0.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/cs89x0.txt
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ NOTE
3---- 3----
4 4
5This document was contributed by Cirrus Logic for kernel 2.2.5. This version 5This document was contributed by Cirrus Logic for kernel 2.2.5. This version
6has been updated for 2.3.48 by Andrew Morton <andrewm@uow.edu.au> 6has been updated for 2.3.48 by Andrew Morton.
7 7
8Cirrus make a copy of this driver available at their website, as 8Cirrus make a copy of this driver available at their website, as
9described below. In general, you should use the driver version which 9described below. In general, you should use the driver version which
@@ -690,7 +690,7 @@ latest drivers and technical publications.
6906.4 Current maintainer 6906.4 Current maintainer
691 691
692In February 2000 the maintenance of this driver was assumed by Andrew 692In February 2000 the maintenance of this driver was assumed by Andrew
693Morton <akpm@zip.com.au> 693Morton.
694 694
6956.5 Kernel module parameters 6956.5 Kernel module parameters
696 696
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt b/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt
index d391ea631141..4caa0e314cc2 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt
@@ -24,4 +24,56 @@ netif_{start|stop|wake}_subqueue() functions to manage each queue while the
24device is still operational. netdev->queue_lock is still used when the device 24device is still operational. netdev->queue_lock is still used when the device
25comes online or when it's completely shut down (unregister_netdev(), etc.). 25comes online or when it's completely shut down (unregister_netdev(), etc.).
26 26
27Author: Peter P. Waskiewicz Jr. <peter.p.waskiewicz.jr@intel.com> 27
28Section 2: Qdisc support for multiqueue devices
29
30-----------------------------------------------
31
32Currently two qdiscs are optimized for multiqueue devices. The first is the
33default pfifo_fast qdisc. This qdisc supports one qdisc per hardware queue.
34A new round-robin qdisc, sch_multiq also supports multiple hardware queues. The
35qdisc is responsible for classifying the skb's and then directing the skb's to
36bands and queues based on the value in skb->queue_mapping. Use this field in
37the base driver to determine which queue to send the skb to.
38
39sch_multiq has been added for hardware that wishes to avoid head-of-line
40blocking. It will cycle though the bands and verify that the hardware queue
41associated with the band is not stopped prior to dequeuing a packet.
42
43On qdisc load, the number of bands is based on the number of queues on the
44hardware. Once the association is made, any skb with skb->queue_mapping set,
45will be queued to the band associated with the hardware queue.
46
47
48Section 3: Brief howto using MULTIQ for multiqueue devices
49---------------------------------------------------------------
50
51The userspace command 'tc,' part of the iproute2 package, is used to configure
52qdiscs. To add the MULTIQ qdisc to your network device, assuming the device
53is called eth0, run the following command:
54
55# tc qdisc add dev eth0 root handle 1: multiq
56
57The qdisc will allocate the number of bands to equal the number of queues that
58the device reports, and bring the qdisc online. Assuming eth0 has 4 Tx
59queues, the band mapping would look like:
60
61band 0 => queue 0
62band 1 => queue 1
63band 2 => queue 2
64band 3 => queue 3
65
66Traffic will begin flowing through each queue based on either the simple_tx_hash
67function or based on netdev->select_queue() if you have it defined.
68
69The behavior of tc filters remains the same. However a new tc action,
70skbedit, has been added. Assuming you wanted to route all traffic to a
71specific host, for example 192.168.0.3, through a specific queue you could use
72this action and establish a filter such as:
73
74tc filter add dev eth0 parent 1: protocol ip prio 1 u32 \
75 match ip dst 192.168.0.3 \
76 action skbedit queue_mapping 3
77
78Author: Alexander Duyck <alexander.h.duyck@intel.com>
79Original Author: Peter P. Waskiewicz Jr. <peter.p.waskiewicz.jr@intel.com>
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/phonet.txt b/Documentation/networking/phonet.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..6a07e45d4a93
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/phonet.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,175 @@
1Linux Phonet protocol family
2============================
3
4Introduction
5------------
6
7Phonet is a packet protocol used by Nokia cellular modems for both IPC
8and RPC. With the Linux Phonet socket family, Linux host processes can
9receive and send messages from/to the modem, or any other external
10device attached to the modem. The modem takes care of routing.
11
12Phonet packets can be exchanged through various hardware connections
13depending on the device, such as:
14 - USB with the CDC Phonet interface,
15 - infrared,
16 - Bluetooth,
17 - an RS232 serial port (with a dedicated "FBUS" line discipline),
18 - the SSI bus with some TI OMAP processors.
19
20
21Packets format
22--------------
23
24Phonet packets have a common header as follows:
25
26 struct phonethdr {
27 uint8_t pn_media; /* Media type (link-layer identifier) */
28 uint8_t pn_rdev; /* Receiver device ID */
29 uint8_t pn_sdev; /* Sender device ID */
30 uint8_t pn_res; /* Resource ID or function */
31 uint16_t pn_length; /* Big-endian message byte length (minus 6) */
32 uint8_t pn_robj; /* Receiver object ID */
33 uint8_t pn_sobj; /* Sender object ID */
34 };
35
36On Linux, the link-layer header includes the pn_media byte (see below).
37The next 7 bytes are part of the network-layer header.
38
39The device ID is split: the 6 higher-order bits consitute the device
40address, while the 2 lower-order bits are used for multiplexing, as are
41the 8-bit object identifiers. As such, Phonet can be considered as a
42network layer with 6 bits of address space and 10 bits for transport
43protocol (much like port numbers in IP world).
44
45The modem always has address number zero. All other device have a their
46own 6-bit address.
47
48
49Link layer
50----------
51
52Phonet links are always point-to-point links. The link layer header
53consists of a single Phonet media type byte. It uniquely identifies the
54link through which the packet is transmitted, from the modem's
55perspective. Each Phonet network device shall prepend and set the media
56type byte as appropriate. For convenience, a common phonet_header_ops
57link-layer header operations structure is provided. It sets the
58media type according to the network device hardware address.
59
60Linux Phonet network interfaces support a dedicated link layer packets
61type (ETH_P_PHONET) which is out of the Ethernet type range. They can
62only send and receive Phonet packets.
63
64The virtual TUN tunnel device driver can also be used for Phonet. This
65requires IFF_TUN mode, _without_ the IFF_NO_PI flag. In this case,
66there is no link-layer header, so there is no Phonet media type byte.
67
68Note that Phonet interfaces are not allowed to re-order packets, so
69only the (default) Linux FIFO qdisc should be used with them.
70
71
72Network layer
73-------------
74
75The Phonet socket address family maps the Phonet packet header:
76
77 struct sockaddr_pn {
78 sa_family_t spn_family; /* AF_PHONET */
79 uint8_t spn_obj; /* Object ID */
80 uint8_t spn_dev; /* Device ID */
81 uint8_t spn_resource; /* Resource or function */
82 uint8_t spn_zero[...]; /* Padding */
83 };
84
85The resource field is only used when sending and receiving;
86It is ignored by bind() and getsockname().
87
88
89Low-level datagram protocol
90---------------------------
91
92Applications can send Phonet messages using the Phonet datagram socket
93protocol from the PF_PHONET family. Each socket is bound to one of the
942^10 object IDs available, and can send and receive packets with any
95other peer.
96
97 struct sockaddr_pn addr = { .spn_family = AF_PHONET, };
98 ssize_t len;
99 socklen_t addrlen = sizeof(addr);
100 int fd;
101
102 fd = socket(PF_PHONET, SOCK_DGRAM, 0);
103 bind(fd, (struct sockaddr *)&addr, sizeof(addr));
104 /* ... */
105
106 sendto(fd, msg, msglen, 0, (struct sockaddr *)&addr, sizeof(addr));
107 len = recvfrom(fd, buf, sizeof(buf), 0,
108 (struct sockaddr *)&addr, &addrlen);
109
110This protocol follows the SOCK_DGRAM connection-less semantics.
111However, connect() and getpeername() are not supported, as they did
112not seem useful with Phonet usages (could be added easily).
113
114
115Phonet Pipe protocol
116--------------------
117
118The Phonet Pipe protocol is a simple sequenced packets protocol
119with end-to-end congestion control. It uses the passive listening
120socket paradigm. The listening socket is bound to an unique free object
121ID. Each listening socket can handle up to 255 simultaneous
122connections, one per accept()'d socket.
123
124 int lfd, cfd;
125
126 lfd = socket(PF_PHONET, SOCK_SEQPACKET, PN_PROTO_PIPE);
127 listen (lfd, INT_MAX);
128
129 /* ... */
130 cfd = accept(lfd, NULL, NULL);
131 for (;;)
132 {
133 char buf[...];
134 ssize_t len = read(cfd, buf, sizeof(buf));
135
136 /* ... */
137
138 write(cfd, msg, msglen);
139 }
140
141Connections are established between two endpoints by a "third party"
142application. This means that both endpoints are passive; so connect()
143is not possible.
144
145WARNING:
146When polling a connected pipe socket for writability, there is an
147intrinsic race condition whereby writability might be lost between the
148polling and the writing system calls. In this case, the socket will
149block until write becomes possible again, unless non-blocking mode
150is enabled.
151
152
153The pipe protocol provides two socket options at the SOL_PNPIPE level:
154
155 PNPIPE_ENCAP accepts one integer value (int) of:
156
157 PNPIPE_ENCAP_NONE: The socket operates normally (default).
158
159 PNPIPE_ENCAP_IP: The socket is used as a backend for a virtual IP
160 interface. This requires CAP_NET_ADMIN capability. GPRS data
161 support on Nokia modems can use this. Note that the socket cannot
162 be reliably poll()'d or read() from while in this mode.
163
164 PNPIPE_IFINDEX is a read-only integer value. It contains the
165 interface index of the network interface created by PNPIPE_ENCAP,
166 or zero if encapsulation is off.
167
168
169Authors
170-------
171
172Linux Phonet was initially written by Sakari Ailus.
173Other contributors include Mikä Liljeberg, Andras Domokos,
174Carlos Chinea and Rémi Denis-Courmont.
175Copyright (C) 2008 Nokia Corporation.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/regulatory.txt b/Documentation/networking/regulatory.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a96989a8ff35
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/regulatory.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,194 @@
1Linux wireless regulatory documentation
2---------------------------------------
3
4This document gives a brief review over how the Linux wireless
5regulatory infrastructure works.
6
7More up to date information can be obtained at the project's web page:
8
9http://wireless.kernel.org/en/developers/Regulatory
10
11Keeping regulatory domains in userspace
12---------------------------------------
13
14Due to the dynamic nature of regulatory domains we keep them
15in userspace and provide a framework for userspace to upload
16to the kernel one regulatory domain to be used as the central
17core regulatory domain all wireless devices should adhere to.
18
19How to get regulatory domains to the kernel
20-------------------------------------------
21
22Userspace gets a regulatory domain in the kernel by having
23a userspace agent build it and send it via nl80211. Only
24expected regulatory domains will be respected by the kernel.
25
26A currently available userspace agent which can accomplish this
27is CRDA - central regulatory domain agent. Its documented here:
28
29http://wireless.kernel.org/en/developers/Regulatory/CRDA
30
31Essentially the kernel will send a udev event when it knows
32it needs a new regulatory domain. A udev rule can be put in place
33to trigger crda to send the respective regulatory domain for a
34specific ISO/IEC 3166 alpha2.
35
36Below is an example udev rule which can be used:
37
38# Example file, should be put in /etc/udev/rules.d/regulatory.rules
39KERNEL=="regulatory*", ACTION=="change", SUBSYSTEM=="platform", RUN+="/sbin/crda"
40
41The alpha2 is passed as an environment variable under the variable COUNTRY.
42
43Who asks for regulatory domains?
44--------------------------------
45
46* Users
47
48Users can use iw:
49
50http://wireless.kernel.org/en/users/Documentation/iw
51
52An example:
53
54 # set regulatory domain to "Costa Rica"
55 iw reg set CR
56
57This will request the kernel to set the regulatory domain to
58the specificied alpha2. The kernel in turn will then ask userspace
59to provide a regulatory domain for the alpha2 specified by the user
60by sending a uevent.
61
62* Wireless subsystems for Country Information elements
63
64The kernel will send a uevent to inform userspace a new
65regulatory domain is required. More on this to be added
66as its integration is added.
67
68* Drivers
69
70If drivers determine they need a specific regulatory domain
71set they can inform the wireless core using regulatory_hint().
72They have two options -- they either provide an alpha2 so that
73crda can provide back a regulatory domain for that country or
74they can build their own regulatory domain based on internal
75custom knowledge so the wireless core can respect it.
76
77*Most* drivers will rely on the first mechanism of providing a
78regulatory hint with an alpha2. For these drivers there is an additional
79check that can be used to ensure compliance based on custom EEPROM
80regulatory data. This additional check can be used by drivers by
81registering on its struct wiphy a reg_notifier() callback. This notifier
82is called when the core's regulatory domain has been changed. The driver
83can use this to review the changes made and also review who made them
84(driver, user, country IE) and determine what to allow based on its
85internal EEPROM data. Devices drivers wishing to be capable of world
86roaming should use this callback. More on world roaming will be
87added to this document when its support is enabled.
88
89Device drivers who provide their own built regulatory domain
90do not need a callback as the channels registered by them are
91the only ones that will be allowed and therefore *additional*
92cannels cannot be enabled.
93
94Example code - drivers hinting an alpha2:
95------------------------------------------
96
97This example comes from the zd1211rw device driver. You can start
98by having a mapping of your device's EEPROM country/regulatory
99domain value to to a specific alpha2 as follows:
100
101static struct zd_reg_alpha2_map reg_alpha2_map[] = {
102 { ZD_REGDOMAIN_FCC, "US" },
103 { ZD_REGDOMAIN_IC, "CA" },
104 { ZD_REGDOMAIN_ETSI, "DE" }, /* Generic ETSI, use most restrictive */
105 { ZD_REGDOMAIN_JAPAN, "JP" },
106 { ZD_REGDOMAIN_JAPAN_ADD, "JP" },
107 { ZD_REGDOMAIN_SPAIN, "ES" },
108 { ZD_REGDOMAIN_FRANCE, "FR" },
109
110Then you can define a routine to map your read EEPROM value to an alpha2,
111as follows:
112
113static int zd_reg2alpha2(u8 regdomain, char *alpha2)
114{
115 unsigned int i;
116 struct zd_reg_alpha2_map *reg_map;
117 for (i = 0; i < ARRAY_SIZE(reg_alpha2_map); i++) {
118 reg_map = &reg_alpha2_map[i];
119 if (regdomain == reg_map->reg) {
120 alpha2[0] = reg_map->alpha2[0];
121 alpha2[1] = reg_map->alpha2[1];
122 return 0;
123 }
124 }
125 return 1;
126}
127
128Lastly, you can then hint to the core of your discovered alpha2, if a match
129was found. You need to do this after you have registered your wiphy. You
130are expected to do this during initialization.
131
132 r = zd_reg2alpha2(mac->regdomain, alpha2);
133 if (!r)
134 regulatory_hint(hw->wiphy, alpha2, NULL);
135
136Example code - drivers providing a built in regulatory domain:
137--------------------------------------------------------------
138
139If you have regulatory information you can obtain from your
140driver and you *need* to use this we let you build a regulatory domain
141structure and pass it to the wireless core. To do this you should
142kmalloc() a structure big enough to hold your regulatory domain
143structure and you should then fill it with your data. Finally you simply
144call regulatory_hint() with the regulatory domain structure in it.
145
146Bellow is a simple example, with a regulatory domain cached using the stack.
147Your implementation may vary (read EEPROM cache instead, for example).
148
149Example cache of some regulatory domain
150
151struct ieee80211_regdomain mydriver_jp_regdom = {
152 .n_reg_rules = 3,
153 .alpha2 = "JP",
154 //.alpha2 = "99", /* If I have no alpha2 to map it to */
155 .reg_rules = {
156 /* IEEE 802.11b/g, channels 1..14 */
157 REG_RULE(2412-20, 2484+20, 40, 6, 20, 0),
158 /* IEEE 802.11a, channels 34..48 */
159 REG_RULE(5170-20, 5240+20, 40, 6, 20,
160 NL80211_RRF_PASSIVE_SCAN),
161 /* IEEE 802.11a, channels 52..64 */
162 REG_RULE(5260-20, 5320+20, 40, 6, 20,
163 NL80211_RRF_NO_IBSS |
164 NL80211_RRF_DFS),
165 }
166};
167
168Then in some part of your code after your wiphy has been registered:
169
170 int r;
171 struct ieee80211_regdomain *rd;
172 int size_of_regd;
173 int num_rules = mydriver_jp_regdom.n_reg_rules;
174 unsigned int i;
175
176 size_of_regd = sizeof(struct ieee80211_regdomain) +
177 (num_rules * sizeof(struct ieee80211_reg_rule));
178
179 rd = kzalloc(size_of_regd, GFP_KERNEL);
180 if (!rd)
181 return -ENOMEM;
182
183 memcpy(rd, &mydriver_jp_regdom, sizeof(struct ieee80211_regdomain));
184
185 for (i=0; i < num_rules; i++) {
186 memcpy(&rd->reg_rules[i], &mydriver_jp_regdom.reg_rules[i],
187 sizeof(struct ieee80211_reg_rule));
188 }
189 r = regulatory_hint(hw->wiphy, NULL, rd);
190 if (r) {
191 kfree(rd);
192 return r;
193 }
194
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/tproxy.txt b/Documentation/networking/tproxy.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7b5996d9357e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/tproxy.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
1Transparent proxy support
2=========================
3
4This feature adds Linux 2.2-like transparent proxy support to current kernels.
5To use it, enable NETFILTER_TPROXY, the socket match and the TPROXY target in
6your kernel config. You will need policy routing too, so be sure to enable that
7as well.
8
9
101. Making non-local sockets work
11================================
12
13The idea is that you identify packets with destination address matching a local
14socket on your box, set the packet mark to a certain value, and then match on that
15value using policy routing to have those packets delivered locally:
16
17# iptables -t mangle -N DIVERT
18# iptables -t mangle -A PREROUTING -p tcp -m socket -j DIVERT
19# iptables -t mangle -A DIVERT -j MARK --set-mark 1
20# iptables -t mangle -A DIVERT -j ACCEPT
21
22# ip rule add fwmark 1 lookup 100
23# ip route add local 0.0.0.0/0 dev lo table 100
24
25Because of certain restrictions in the IPv4 routing output code you'll have to
26modify your application to allow it to send datagrams _from_ non-local IP
27addresses. All you have to do is enable the (SOL_IP, IP_TRANSPARENT) socket
28option before calling bind:
29
30fd = socket(AF_INET, SOCK_STREAM, 0);
31/* - 8< -*/
32int value = 1;
33setsockopt(fd, SOL_IP, IP_TRANSPARENT, &value, sizeof(value));
34/* - 8< -*/
35name.sin_family = AF_INET;
36name.sin_port = htons(0xCAFE);
37name.sin_addr.s_addr = htonl(0xDEADBEEF);
38bind(fd, &name, sizeof(name));
39
40A trivial patch for netcat is available here:
41http://people.netfilter.org/hidden/tproxy/netcat-ip_transparent-support.patch
42
43
442. Redirecting traffic
45======================
46
47Transparent proxying often involves "intercepting" traffic on a router. This is
48usually done with the iptables REDIRECT target; however, there are serious
49limitations of that method. One of the major issues is that it actually
50modifies the packets to change the destination address -- which might not be
51acceptable in certain situations. (Think of proxying UDP for example: you won't
52be able to find out the original destination address. Even in case of TCP
53getting the original destination address is racy.)
54
55The 'TPROXY' target provides similar functionality without relying on NAT. Simply
56add rules like this to the iptables ruleset above:
57
58# iptables -t mangle -A PREROUTING -p tcp --dport 80 -j TPROXY \
59 --tproxy-mark 0x1/0x1 --on-port 50080
60
61Note that for this to work you'll have to modify the proxy to enable (SOL_IP,
62IP_TRANSPARENT) for the listening socket.
63
64
653. Iptables extensions
66======================
67
68To use tproxy you'll need to have the 'socket' and 'TPROXY' modules
69compiled for iptables. A patched version of iptables is available
70here: http://git.balabit.hu/?p=bazsi/iptables-tproxy.git
71
72
734. Application support
74======================
75
764.1. Squid
77----------
78
79Squid 3.HEAD has support built-in. To use it, pass
80'--enable-linux-netfilter' to configure and set the 'tproxy' option on
81the HTTP listener you redirect traffic to with the TPROXY iptables
82target.
83
84For more information please consult the following page on the Squid
85wiki: http://wiki.squid-cache.org/Features/Tproxy4
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/vortex.txt b/Documentation/networking/vortex.txt
index 6356d3faed36..bd70976b8160 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/vortex.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/vortex.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
1Documentation/networking/vortex.txt 1Documentation/networking/vortex.txt
2Andrew Morton <andrewm@uow.edu.au> 2Andrew Morton
330 April 2000 330 April 2000
4 4
5 5
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ The driver was written by Donald Becker <becker@scyld.com>
11Don is no longer the prime maintainer of this version of the driver. 11Don is no longer the prime maintainer of this version of the driver.
12Please report problems to one or more of: 12Please report problems to one or more of:
13 13
14 Andrew Morton <akpm@osdl.org> 14 Andrew Morton
15 Netdev mailing list <netdev@vger.kernel.org> 15 Netdev mailing list <netdev@vger.kernel.org>
16 Linux kernel mailing list <linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org> 16 Linux kernel mailing list <linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org>
17 17
@@ -305,11 +305,6 @@ Donald's wake-on-LAN page:
305 305
306 ftp://ftp.3com.com/pub/nic/3c90x/3c90xx2.exe 306 ftp://ftp.3com.com/pub/nic/3c90x/3c90xx2.exe
307 307
308Driver updates and a detailed changelog for the modifications which
309were made for the 2.3/2,4 series kernel is available at
310
311 http://www.zip.com.au/~akpm/linux/#3c59x-bc
312
313 308
314Autonegotiation notes 309Autonegotiation notes
315--------------------- 310---------------------
diff --git a/Documentation/pcmcia/driver-changes.txt b/Documentation/pcmcia/driver-changes.txt
index 96f155e68750..059934363caf 100644
--- a/Documentation/pcmcia/driver-changes.txt
+++ b/Documentation/pcmcia/driver-changes.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,11 @@
1This file details changes in 2.6 which affect PCMCIA card driver authors: 1This file details changes in 2.6 which affect PCMCIA card driver authors:
2 2
3* New configuration loop helper (as of 2.6.28)
4 By calling pcmcia_loop_config(), a driver can iterate over all available
5 configuration options. During a driver's probe() phase, one doesn't need
6 to use pcmcia_get_{first,next}_tuple, pcmcia_get_tuple_data and
7 pcmcia_parse_tuple directly in most if not all cases.
8
3* New release helper (as of 2.6.17) 9* New release helper (as of 2.6.17)
4 Instead of calling pcmcia_release_{configuration,io,irq,win}, all that's 10 Instead of calling pcmcia_release_{configuration,io,irq,win}, all that's
5 necessary now is calling pcmcia_disable_device. As there is no valid 11 necessary now is calling pcmcia_disable_device. As there is no valid
diff --git a/Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt b/Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt
index c9a35665cf70..ce3487d99abe 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt
@@ -2,17 +2,8 @@ Regulator Machine Driver Interface
2=================================== 2===================================
3 3
4The regulator machine driver interface is intended for board/machine specific 4The regulator machine driver interface is intended for board/machine specific
5initialisation code to configure the regulator subsystem. Typical things that 5initialisation code to configure the regulator subsystem.
6machine drivers would do are :-
7 6
8 1. Regulator -> Device mapping.
9 2. Regulator supply configuration.
10 3. Power Domain constraint setting.
11
12
13
141. Regulator -> device mapping
15==============================
16Consider the following machine :- 7Consider the following machine :-
17 8
18 Regulator-1 -+-> Regulator-2 --> [Consumer A @ 1.8 - 2.0V] 9 Regulator-1 -+-> Regulator-2 --> [Consumer A @ 1.8 - 2.0V]
@@ -21,81 +12,82 @@ Consider the following machine :-
21 12
22The drivers for consumers A & B must be mapped to the correct regulator in 13The drivers for consumers A & B must be mapped to the correct regulator in
23order to control their power supply. This mapping can be achieved in machine 14order to control their power supply. This mapping can be achieved in machine
24initialisation code by calling :- 15initialisation code by creating a struct regulator_consumer_supply for
16each regulator.
17
18struct regulator_consumer_supply {
19 struct device *dev; /* consumer */
20 const char *supply; /* consumer supply - e.g. "vcc" */
21};
25 22
26int regulator_set_device_supply(const char *regulator, struct device *dev, 23e.g. for the machine above
27 const char *supply);
28 24
29and is shown with the following code :- 25static struct regulator_consumer_supply regulator1_consumers[] = {
26{
27 .dev = &platform_consumerB_device.dev,
28 .supply = "Vcc",
29},};
30 30
31regulator_set_device_supply("Regulator-1", devB, "Vcc"); 31static struct regulator_consumer_supply regulator2_consumers[] = {
32regulator_set_device_supply("Regulator-2", devA, "Vcc"); 32{
33 .dev = &platform_consumerA_device.dev,
34 .supply = "Vcc",
35},};
33 36
34This maps Regulator-1 to the 'Vcc' supply for Consumer B and maps Regulator-2 37This maps Regulator-1 to the 'Vcc' supply for Consumer B and maps Regulator-2
35to the 'Vcc' supply for Consumer A. 38to the 'Vcc' supply for Consumer A.
36 39
37 40Constraints can now be registered by defining a struct regulator_init_data
382. Regulator supply configuration. 41for each regulator power domain. This structure also maps the consumers
39================================== 42to their supply regulator :-
40Consider the following machine (again) :- 43
41 44static struct regulator_init_data regulator1_data = {
42 Regulator-1 -+-> Regulator-2 --> [Consumer A @ 1.8 - 2.0V] 45 .constraints = {
43 | 46 .min_uV = 3300000,
44 +-> [Consumer B @ 3.3V] 47 .max_uV = 3300000,
48 .valid_modes_mask = REGULATOR_MODE_NORMAL,
49 },
50 .num_consumer_supplies = ARRAY_SIZE(regulator1_consumers),
51 .consumer_supplies = regulator1_consumers,
52};
45 53
46Regulator-1 supplies power to Regulator-2. This relationship must be registered 54Regulator-1 supplies power to Regulator-2. This relationship must be registered
47with the core so that Regulator-1 is also enabled when Consumer A enables it's 55with the core so that Regulator-1 is also enabled when Consumer A enables it's
48supply (Regulator-2). 56supply (Regulator-2). The supply regulator is set by the supply_regulator_dev
49 57field below:-
50This relationship can be register with the core via :- 58
51 59static struct regulator_init_data regulator2_data = {
52int regulator_set_supply(const char *regulator, const char *regulator_supply); 60 .supply_regulator_dev = &platform_regulator1_device.dev,
53 61 .constraints = {
54In this example we would use the following code :- 62 .min_uV = 1800000,
55 63 .max_uV = 2000000,
56regulator_set_supply("Regulator-2", "Regulator-1"); 64 .valid_ops_mask = REGULATOR_CHANGE_VOLTAGE,
57 65 .valid_modes_mask = REGULATOR_MODE_NORMAL,
58Relationships can be queried by calling :- 66 },
59 67 .num_consumer_supplies = ARRAY_SIZE(regulator2_consumers),
60const char *regulator_get_supply(const char *regulator); 68 .consumer_supplies = regulator2_consumers,
61
62
633. Power Domain constraint setting.
64===================================
65Each power domain within a system has physical constraints on voltage and
66current. This must be defined in software so that the power domain is always
67operated within specifications.
68
69Consider the following machine (again) :-
70
71 Regulator-1 -+-> Regulator-2 --> [Consumer A @ 1.8 - 2.0V]
72 |
73 +-> [Consumer B @ 3.3V]
74
75This gives us two regulators and two power domains:
76
77 Domain 1: Regulator-2, Consumer B.
78 Domain 2: Consumer A.
79
80Constraints can be registered by calling :-
81
82int regulator_set_platform_constraints(const char *regulator,
83 struct regulation_constraints *constraints);
84
85The example is defined as follows :-
86
87struct regulation_constraints domain_1 = {
88 .min_uV = 3300000,
89 .max_uV = 3300000,
90 .valid_modes_mask = REGULATOR_MODE_NORMAL,
91}; 69};
92 70
93struct regulation_constraints domain_2 = { 71Finally the regulator devices must be registered in the usual manner.
94 .min_uV = 1800000, 72
95 .max_uV = 2000000, 73static struct platform_device regulator_devices[] = {
96 .valid_ops_mask = REGULATOR_CHANGE_VOLTAGE, 74{
97 .valid_modes_mask = REGULATOR_MODE_NORMAL, 75 .name = "regulator",
76 .id = DCDC_1,
77 .dev = {
78 .platform_data = &regulator1_data,
79 },
80},
81{
82 .name = "regulator",
83 .id = DCDC_2,
84 .dev = {
85 .platform_data = &regulator2_data,
86 },
87},
98}; 88};
89/* register regulator 1 device */
90platform_device_register(&wm8350_regulator_devices[0]);
99 91
100regulator_set_platform_constraints("Regulator-1", &domain_1); 92/* register regulator 2 device */
101regulator_set_platform_constraints("Regulator-2", &domain_2); 93platform_device_register(&wm8350_regulator_devices[1]);
diff --git a/Documentation/power/regulator/regulator.txt b/Documentation/power/regulator/regulator.txt
index a69050143592..4200accb9bba 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/regulator/regulator.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/regulator/regulator.txt
@@ -10,11 +10,11 @@ Registration
10 10
11Drivers can register a regulator by calling :- 11Drivers can register a regulator by calling :-
12 12
13struct regulator_dev *regulator_register(struct regulator_desc *regulator_desc, 13struct regulator_dev *regulator_register(struct device *dev,
14 void *reg_data); 14 struct regulator_desc *regulator_desc);
15 15
16This will register the regulators capabilities and operations the regulator 16This will register the regulators capabilities and operations to the regulator
17core. The core does not touch reg_data (private to regulator driver). 17core.
18 18
19Regulators can be unregistered by calling :- 19Regulators can be unregistered by calling :-
20 20
diff --git a/Documentation/power/s2ram.txt b/Documentation/power/s2ram.txt
index b05f512130ea..2ebdc6091ce1 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/s2ram.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/s2ram.txt
@@ -54,3 +54,21 @@ used to run with "radeonfb" (it's an ATI Radeon mobility). It turns out
54that "radeonfb" simply cannot resume that device - it tries to set the 54that "radeonfb" simply cannot resume that device - it tries to set the
55PLL's, and it just _hangs_. Using the regular VGA console and letting X 55PLL's, and it just _hangs_. Using the regular VGA console and letting X
56resume it instead works fine. 56resume it instead works fine.
57
58NOTE
59====
60pm_trace uses the system's Real Time Clock (RTC) to save the magic number.
61Reason for this is that the RTC is the only reliably available piece of
62hardware during resume operations where a value can be set that will
63survive a reboot.
64
65Consequence is that after a resume (even if it is successful) your system
66clock will have a value corresponding to the magic mumber instead of the
67correct date/time! It is therefore advisable to use a program like ntp-date
68or rdate to reset the correct date/time from an external time source when
69using this trace option.
70
71As the clock keeps ticking it is also essential that the reboot is done
72quickly after the resume failure. The trace option does not use the seconds
73or the low order bits of the minutes of the RTC, but a too long delay will
74corrupt the magic value.
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX b/Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX
index 29d839ce7327..e3960b8c8689 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX
@@ -18,10 +18,6 @@ mpc52xx.txt
18 - Linux 2.6.x on MPC52xx family 18 - Linux 2.6.x on MPC52xx family
19mpc52xx-device-tree-bindings.txt 19mpc52xx-device-tree-bindings.txt
20 - MPC5200 Device Tree Bindings 20 - MPC5200 Device Tree Bindings
21ppc_htab.txt
22 - info about the Linux/PPC /proc/ppc_htab entry
23smp.txt
24 - use and state info about Linux/PPC on MP machines
25sound.txt 21sound.txt
26 - info on sound support under Linux/PPC 22 - info on sound support under Linux/PPC
27zImage_layout.txt 23zImage_layout.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/83xx-512x-pci.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/83xx-512x-pci.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..35a465362408
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/83xx-512x-pci.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
1* Freescale 83xx and 512x PCI bridges
2
3Freescale 83xx and 512x SOCs include the same pci bridge core.
4
583xx/512x specific notes:
6- reg: should contain two address length tuples
7 The first is for the internal pci bridge registers
8 The second is for the pci config space access registers
9
10Example (MPC8313ERDB)
11 pci0: pci@e0008500 {
12 cell-index = <1>;
13 interrupt-map-mask = <0xf800 0x0 0x0 0x7>;
14 interrupt-map = <
15 /* IDSEL 0x0E -mini PCI */
16 0x7000 0x0 0x0 0x1 &ipic 18 0x8
17 0x7000 0x0 0x0 0x2 &ipic 18 0x8
18 0x7000 0x0 0x0 0x3 &ipic 18 0x8
19 0x7000 0x0 0x0 0x4 &ipic 18 0x8
20
21 /* IDSEL 0x0F - PCI slot */
22 0x7800 0x0 0x0 0x1 &ipic 17 0x8
23 0x7800 0x0 0x0 0x2 &ipic 18 0x8
24 0x7800 0x0 0x0 0x3 &ipic 17 0x8
25 0x7800 0x0 0x0 0x4 &ipic 18 0x8>;
26 interrupt-parent = <&ipic>;
27 interrupts = <66 0x8>;
28 bus-range = <0x0 0x0>;
29 ranges = <0x02000000 0x0 0x90000000 0x90000000 0x0 0x10000000
30 0x42000000 0x0 0x80000000 0x80000000 0x0 0x10000000
31 0x01000000 0x0 0x00000000 0xe2000000 0x0 0x00100000>;
32 clock-frequency = <66666666>;
33 #interrupt-cells = <1>;
34 #size-cells = <2>;
35 #address-cells = <3>;
36 reg = <0xe0008500 0x100 /* internal registers */
37 0xe0008300 0x8>; /* config space access registers */
38 compatible = "fsl,mpc8349-pci";
39 device_type = "pci";
40 };
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/8xxx_gpio.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/8xxx_gpio.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d015dcec4011
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/8xxx_gpio.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
1GPIO controllers on MPC8xxx SoCs
2
3This is for the non-QE/CPM/GUTs GPIO controllers as found on
48349, 8572, 8610 and compatible.
5
6Every GPIO controller node must have #gpio-cells property defined,
7this information will be used to translate gpio-specifiers.
8
9Required properties:
10- compatible : "fsl,<CHIP>-gpio" followed by "fsl,mpc8349-gpio" for
11 83xx, "fsl,mpc8572-gpio" for 85xx and "fsl,mpc8610-gpio" for 86xx.
12- #gpio-cells : Should be two. The first cell is the pin number and the
13 second cell is used to specify optional parameters (currently unused).
14 - interrupts : Interrupt mapping for GPIO IRQ (currently unused).
15 - interrupt-parent : Phandle for the interrupt controller that
16 services interrupts for this device.
17- gpio-controller : Marks the port as GPIO controller.
18
19Example of gpio-controller nodes for a MPC8347 SoC:
20
21 gpio1: gpio-controller@c00 {
22 #gpio-cells = <2>;
23 compatible = "fsl,mpc8347-gpio", "fsl,mpc8349-gpio";
24 reg = <0xc00 0x100>;
25 interrupts = <74 0x8>;
26 interrupt-parent = <&ipic>;
27 gpio-controller;
28 };
29
30 gpio2: gpio-controller@d00 {
31 #gpio-cells = <2>;
32 compatible = "fsl,mpc8347-gpio", "fsl,mpc8349-gpio";
33 reg = <0xd00 0x100>;
34 interrupts = <75 0x8>;
35 interrupt-parent = <&ipic>;
36 gpio-controller;
37 };
38
39See booting-without-of.txt for details of how to specify GPIO
40information for devices.
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/dma.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/dma.txt
index 86826df00e64..cc453110fc46 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/dma.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/dma.txt
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ Required properties:
20 - compatible : compatible list, contains 2 entries, first is 20 - compatible : compatible list, contains 2 entries, first is
21 "fsl,CHIP-dma-channel", where CHIP is the processor 21 "fsl,CHIP-dma-channel", where CHIP is the processor
22 (mpc8349, mpc8350, etc.) and the second is 22 (mpc8349, mpc8350, etc.) and the second is
23 "fsl,elo-dma-channel" 23 "fsl,elo-dma-channel". However, see note below.
24 - reg : <registers mapping for channel> 24 - reg : <registers mapping for channel>
25 - cell-index : dma channel index starts at 0. 25 - cell-index : dma channel index starts at 0.
26 26
@@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ Required properties:
82 - compatible : compatible list, contains 2 entries, first is 82 - compatible : compatible list, contains 2 entries, first is
83 "fsl,CHIP-dma-channel", where CHIP is the processor 83 "fsl,CHIP-dma-channel", where CHIP is the processor
84 (mpc8540, mpc8560, etc.) and the second is 84 (mpc8540, mpc8560, etc.) and the second is
85 "fsl,eloplus-dma-channel" 85 "fsl,eloplus-dma-channel". However, see note below.
86 - cell-index : dma channel index starts at 0. 86 - cell-index : dma channel index starts at 0.
87 - reg : <registers mapping for channel> 87 - reg : <registers mapping for channel>
88 - interrupts : <interrupt mapping for DMA channel IRQ> 88 - interrupts : <interrupt mapping for DMA channel IRQ>
@@ -125,3 +125,12 @@ Example:
125 interrupts = <17 2>; 125 interrupts = <17 2>;
126 }; 126 };
127 }; 127 };
128
129Note on DMA channel compatible properties: The compatible property must say
130"fsl,elo-dma-channel" or "fsl,eloplus-dma-channel" to be used by the Elo DMA
131driver (fsldma). Any DMA channel used by fsldma cannot be used by another
132DMA driver, such as the SSI sound drivers for the MPC8610. Therefore, any DMA
133channel that should be used for another driver should not use
134"fsl,elo-dma-channel" or "fsl,eloplus-dma-channel". For the SSI drivers, for
135example, the compatible property should be "fsl,ssi-dma-channel". See ssi.txt
136for more information.
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/ssi.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/ssi.txt
index d100555d488a..a2d963998a65 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/ssi.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/ssi.txt
@@ -24,6 +24,12 @@ Required properties:
24 "rj-master" - r.j., SSI is clock master 24 "rj-master" - r.j., SSI is clock master
25 "ac97-slave" - AC97 mode, SSI is clock slave 25 "ac97-slave" - AC97 mode, SSI is clock slave
26 "ac97-master" - AC97 mode, SSI is clock master 26 "ac97-master" - AC97 mode, SSI is clock master
27- fsl,playback-dma: phandle to a node for the DMA channel to use for
28 playback of audio. This is typically dictated by SOC
29 design. See the notes below.
30- fsl,capture-dma: phandle to a node for the DMA channel to use for
31 capture (recording) of audio. This is typically dictated
32 by SOC design. See the notes below.
27 33
28Optional properties: 34Optional properties:
29- codec-handle : phandle to a 'codec' node that defines an audio 35- codec-handle : phandle to a 'codec' node that defines an audio
@@ -36,3 +42,20 @@ Child 'codec' node required properties:
36Child 'codec' node optional properties: 42Child 'codec' node optional properties:
37- clock-frequency : The frequency of the input clock, which typically 43- clock-frequency : The frequency of the input clock, which typically
38 comes from an on-board dedicated oscillator. 44 comes from an on-board dedicated oscillator.
45
46Notes on fsl,playback-dma and fsl,capture-dma:
47
48On SOCs that have an SSI, specific DMA channels are hard-wired for playback
49and capture. On the MPC8610, for example, SSI1 must use DMA channel 0 for
50playback and DMA channel 1 for capture. SSI2 must use DMA channel 2 for
51playback and DMA channel 3 for capture. The developer can choose which
52DMA controller to use, but the channels themselves are hard-wired. The
53purpose of these two properties is to represent this hardware design.
54
55The device tree nodes for the DMA channels that are referenced by
56"fsl,playback-dma" and "fsl,capture-dma" must be marked as compatible with
57"fsl,ssi-dma-channel". The SOC-specific compatible string (e.g.
58"fsl,mpc8610-dma-channel") can remain. If these nodes are left as
59"fsl,elo-dma-channel" or "fsl,eloplus-dma-channel", then the generic Elo DMA
60drivers (fsldma) will attempt to use them, and it will conflict with the
61sound drivers.
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/ppc_htab.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/ppc_htab.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 8b8c7df29fa9..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/ppc_htab.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,118 +0,0 @@
1 Information about /proc/ppc_htab
2=====================================================================
3
4This document and the related code was written by me (Cort Dougan), please
5email me (cort@fsmlabs.com) if you have questions, comments or corrections.
6
7Last Change: 2.16.98
8
9This entry in the proc directory is readable by all users but only
10writable by root.
11
12The ppc_htab interface is a user level way of accessing the
13performance monitoring registers as well as providing information
14about the PTE hash table.
15
161. Reading
17
18 Reading this file will give you information about the memory management
19 hash table that serves as an extended tlb for page translation on the
20 powerpc. It will also give you information about performance measurement
21 specific to the cpu that you are using.
22
23 Explanation of the 604 Performance Monitoring Fields:
24 MMCR0 - the current value of the MMCR0 register
25 PMC1
26 PMC2 - the value of the performance counters and a
27 description of what events they are counting
28 which are based on MMCR0 bit settings.
29 Explanation of the PTE Hash Table fields:
30
31 Size - hash table size in Kb.
32 Buckets - number of buckets in the table.
33 Address - the virtual kernel address of the hash table base.
34 Entries - the number of ptes that can be stored in the hash table.
35 User/Kernel - how many pte's are in use by the kernel or user at that time.
36 Overflows - How many of the entries are in their secondary hash location.
37 Percent full - ratio of free pte entries to in use entries.
38 Reloads - Count of how many hash table misses have occurred
39 that were fixed with a reload from the linux tables.
40 Should always be 0 on 603 based machines.
41 Non-error Misses - Count of how many hash table misses have occurred
42 that were completed with the creation of a pte in the linux
43 tables with a call to do_page_fault().
44 Error Misses - Number of misses due to errors such as bad address
45 and permission violations. This includes kernel access of
46 bad user addresses that are fixed up by the trap handler.
47
48 Note that calculation of the data displayed from /proc/ppc_htab takes
49 a long time and spends a great deal of time in the kernel. It would
50 be quite hard on performance to read this file constantly. In time
51 there may be a counter in the kernel that allows successive reads from
52 this file only after a given amount of time has passed to reduce the
53 possibility of a user slowing the system by reading this file.
54
552. Writing
56
57 Writing to the ppc_htab allows you to change the characteristics of
58 the powerpc PTE hash table and setup performance monitoring.
59
60 Resizing the PTE hash table is not enabled right now due to many
61 complications with moving the hash table, rehashing the entries
62 and many many SMP issues that would have to be dealt with.
63
64 Write options to ppc_htab:
65
66 - To set the size of the hash table to 64Kb:
67
68 echo 'size 64' > /proc/ppc_htab
69
70 The size must be a multiple of 64 and must be greater than or equal to
71 64.
72
73 - To turn off performance monitoring:
74
75 echo 'off' > /proc/ppc_htab
76
77 - To reset the counters without changing what they're counting:
78
79 echo 'reset' > /proc/ppc_htab
80
81 Note that counting will continue after the reset if it is enabled.
82
83 - To count only events in user mode or only in kernel mode:
84
85 echo 'user' > /proc/ppc_htab
86 ...or...
87 echo 'kernel' > /proc/ppc_htab
88
89 Note that these two options are exclusive of one another and the
90 lack of either of these options counts user and kernel.
91 Using 'reset' and 'off' reset these flags.
92
93 - The 604 has 2 performance counters which can each count events from
94 a specific set of events. These sets are disjoint so it is not
95 possible to count _any_ combination of 2 events. One event can
96 be counted by PMC1 and one by PMC2.
97
98 To start counting a particular event use:
99
100 echo 'event' > /proc/ppc_htab
101
102 and choose from these events:
103
104 PMC1
105 ----
106 'ic miss' - instruction cache misses
107 'dtlb' - data tlb misses (not hash table misses)
108
109 PMC2
110 ----
111 'dc miss' - data cache misses
112 'itlb' - instruction tlb misses (not hash table misses)
113 'load miss time' - cycles to complete a load miss
114
1153. Bugs
116
117 The PMC1 and PMC2 counters can overflow and give no indication of that
118 in /proc/ppc_htab.
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/smp.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/smp.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 5b581b849ff7..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/smp.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,34 +0,0 @@
1 Information about Linux/PPC SMP mode
2=====================================================================
3
4This document and the related code was written by me
5(Cort Dougan, cort@fsmlabs.com) please email me if you have questions,
6comments or corrections.
7
8Last Change: 3.31.99
9
10If you want to help by writing code or testing different hardware please
11email me!
12
131. State of Supported Hardware
14
15 PowerSurge Architecture - tested on UMAX s900, Apple 9600
16 The second processor on this machine boots up just fine and
17 enters its idle loop. Hopefully a completely working SMP kernel
18 on this machine will be done shortly.
19
20 The code makes the assumption of only two processors. The changes
21 necessary to work with any number would not be overly difficult but
22 I don't have any machines with >2 processors so it's not high on my
23 list of priorities. If anyone else would like do to the work email
24 me and I can point out the places that need changed. If you have >2
25 processors and don't want to add support yourself let me know and I
26 can take a look into it.
27
28 BeBox
29 BeBox support hasn't been added to the 2.1.X kernels from 2.0.X
30 but work is being done and SMP support for BeBox is in the works.
31
32 CHRP
33 CHRP SMP works and is fairly solid. It's been tested on the IBM F50
34 with 4 processors for quite some time now.
diff --git a/Documentation/rfkill.txt b/Documentation/rfkill.txt
index 6fcb3060dec5..b65f0799df48 100644
--- a/Documentation/rfkill.txt
+++ b/Documentation/rfkill.txt
@@ -341,6 +341,8 @@ key that does nothing by itself, as well as any hot key that is type-specific
3413.1 Guidelines for wireless device drivers 3413.1 Guidelines for wireless device drivers
342------------------------------------------ 342------------------------------------------
343 343
344(in this text, rfkill->foo means the foo field of struct rfkill).
345
3441. Each independent transmitter in a wireless device (usually there is only one 3461. Each independent transmitter in a wireless device (usually there is only one
345transmitter per device) should have a SINGLE rfkill class attached to it. 347transmitter per device) should have a SINGLE rfkill class attached to it.
346 348
@@ -363,10 +365,32 @@ This rule exists because users of the rfkill subsystem expect to get (and set,
363when possible) the overall transmitter rfkill state, not of a particular rfkill 365when possible) the overall transmitter rfkill state, not of a particular rfkill
364line. 366line.
365 367
3665. During suspend, the rfkill class will attempt to soft-block the radio 3685. The wireless device driver MUST NOT leave the transmitter enabled during
367through a call to rfkill->toggle_radio, and will try to restore its previous 369suspend and hibernation unless:
368state during resume. After a rfkill class is suspended, it will *not* call 370
369rfkill->toggle_radio until it is resumed. 371 5.1. The transmitter has to be enabled for some sort of functionality
372 like wake-on-wireless-packet or autonomous packed forwarding in a mesh
373 network, and that functionality is enabled for this suspend/hibernation
374 cycle.
375
376AND
377
378 5.2. The device was not on a user-requested BLOCKED state before
379 the suspend (i.e. the driver must NOT unblock a device, not even
380 to support wake-on-wireless-packet or remain in the mesh).
381
382In other words, there is absolutely no allowed scenario where a driver can
383automatically take action to unblock a rfkill controller (obviously, this deals
384with scenarios where soft-blocking or both soft and hard blocking is happening.
385Scenarios where hardware rfkill lines are the only ones blocking the
386transmitter are outside of this rule, since the wireless device driver does not
387control its input hardware rfkill lines in the first place).
388
3896. During resume, rfkill will try to restore its previous state.
390
3917. After a rfkill class is suspended, it will *not* call rfkill->toggle_radio
392until it is resumed.
393
370 394
371Example of a WLAN wireless driver connected to the rfkill subsystem: 395Example of a WLAN wireless driver connected to the rfkill subsystem:
372-------------------------------------------------------------------- 396--------------------------------------------------------------------
diff --git a/Documentation/s390/CommonIO b/Documentation/s390/CommonIO
index bf0baa19ec24..339207d11d95 100644
--- a/Documentation/s390/CommonIO
+++ b/Documentation/s390/CommonIO
@@ -70,13 +70,19 @@ Command line parameters
70 70
71 Note: While already known devices can be added to the list of devices to be 71 Note: While already known devices can be added to the list of devices to be
72 ignored, there will be no effect on then. However, if such a device 72 ignored, there will be no effect on then. However, if such a device
73 disappears and then reappears, it will then be ignored. 73 disappears and then reappears, it will then be ignored. To make
74 known devices go away, you need the "purge" command (see below).
74 75
75 For example, 76 For example,
76 "echo add 0.0.a000-0.0.accc, 0.0.af00-0.0.afff > /proc/cio_ignore" 77 "echo add 0.0.a000-0.0.accc, 0.0.af00-0.0.afff > /proc/cio_ignore"
77 will add 0.0.a000-0.0.accc and 0.0.af00-0.0.afff to the list of ignored 78 will add 0.0.a000-0.0.accc and 0.0.af00-0.0.afff to the list of ignored
78 devices. 79 devices.
79 80
81 You can remove already known but now ignored devices via
82 "echo purge > /proc/cio_ignore"
83 All devices ignored but still registered and not online (= not in use)
84 will be deregistered and thus removed from the system.
85
80 The devices can be specified either by bus id (0.x.abcd) or, for 2.4 backward 86 The devices can be specified either by bus id (0.x.abcd) or, for 2.4 backward
81 compatibility, by the device number in hexadecimal (0xabcd or abcd). Device 87 compatibility, by the device number in hexadecimal (0xabcd or abcd). Device
82 numbers given as 0xabcd will be interpreted as 0.0.abcd. 88 numbers given as 0xabcd will be interpreted as 0.0.abcd.
@@ -98,8 +104,7 @@ debugfs entries
98 handling). 104 handling).
99 105
100 - /sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf/cio_msg/sprintf 106 - /sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf/cio_msg/sprintf
101 Various debug messages from the common I/O-layer, including messages 107 Various debug messages from the common I/O-layer.
102 printed when cio_msg=yes.
103 108
104 - /sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf/cio_trace/hex_ascii 109 - /sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf/cio_trace/hex_ascii
105 Logs the calling of functions in the common I/O-layer and, if applicable, 110 Logs the calling of functions in the common I/O-layer and, if applicable,
diff --git a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt
index 88bcb8767335..9d8eb553884c 100644
--- a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt
+++ b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt
@@ -1,151 +1,242 @@
1 =============
2 CFS Scheduler
3 =============
1 4
2This is the CFS scheduler.
3
480% of CFS's design can be summed up in a single sentence: CFS basically
5models an "ideal, precise multi-tasking CPU" on real hardware.
6
7"Ideal multi-tasking CPU" is a (non-existent :-)) CPU that has 100%
8physical power and which can run each task at precise equal speed, in
9parallel, each at 1/nr_running speed. For example: if there are 2 tasks
10running then it runs each at 50% physical power - totally in parallel.
11
12On real hardware, we can run only a single task at once, so while that
13one task runs, the other tasks that are waiting for the CPU are at a
14disadvantage - the current task gets an unfair amount of CPU time. In
15CFS this fairness imbalance is expressed and tracked via the per-task
16p->wait_runtime (nanosec-unit) value. "wait_runtime" is the amount of
17time the task should now run on the CPU for it to become completely fair
18and balanced.
19
20( small detail: on 'ideal' hardware, the p->wait_runtime value would
21 always be zero - no task would ever get 'out of balance' from the
22 'ideal' share of CPU time. )
23
24CFS's task picking logic is based on this p->wait_runtime value and it
25is thus very simple: it always tries to run the task with the largest
26p->wait_runtime value. In other words, CFS tries to run the task with
27the 'gravest need' for more CPU time. So CFS always tries to split up
28CPU time between runnable tasks as close to 'ideal multitasking
29hardware' as possible.
30
31Most of the rest of CFS's design just falls out of this really simple
32concept, with a few add-on embellishments like nice levels,
33multiprocessing and various algorithm variants to recognize sleepers.
34
35In practice it works like this: the system runs a task a bit, and when
36the task schedules (or a scheduler tick happens) the task's CPU usage is
37'accounted for': the (small) time it just spent using the physical CPU
38is deducted from p->wait_runtime. [minus the 'fair share' it would have
39gotten anyway]. Once p->wait_runtime gets low enough so that another
40task becomes the 'leftmost task' of the time-ordered rbtree it maintains
41(plus a small amount of 'granularity' distance relative to the leftmost
42task so that we do not over-schedule tasks and trash the cache) then the
43new leftmost task is picked and the current task is preempted.
44
45The rq->fair_clock value tracks the 'CPU time a runnable task would have
46fairly gotten, had it been runnable during that time'. So by using
47rq->fair_clock values we can accurately timestamp and measure the
48'expected CPU time' a task should have gotten. All runnable tasks are
49sorted in the rbtree by the "rq->fair_clock - p->wait_runtime" key, and
50CFS picks the 'leftmost' task and sticks to it. As the system progresses
51forwards, newly woken tasks are put into the tree more and more to the
52right - slowly but surely giving a chance for every task to become the
53'leftmost task' and thus get on the CPU within a deterministic amount of
54time.
55
56Some implementation details:
57
58 - the introduction of Scheduling Classes: an extensible hierarchy of
59 scheduler modules. These modules encapsulate scheduling policy
60 details and are handled by the scheduler core without the core
61 code assuming about them too much.
62
63 - sched_fair.c implements the 'CFS desktop scheduler': it is a
64 replacement for the vanilla scheduler's SCHED_OTHER interactivity
65 code.
66
67 I'd like to give credit to Con Kolivas for the general approach here:
68 he has proven via RSDL/SD that 'fair scheduling' is possible and that
69 it results in better desktop scheduling. Kudos Con!
70
71 The CFS patch uses a completely different approach and implementation
72 from RSDL/SD. My goal was to make CFS's interactivity quality exceed
73 that of RSDL/SD, which is a high standard to meet :-) Testing
74 feedback is welcome to decide this one way or another. [ and, in any
75 case, all of SD's logic could be added via a kernel/sched_sd.c module
76 as well, if Con is interested in such an approach. ]
77
78 CFS's design is quite radical: it does not use runqueues, it uses a
79 time-ordered rbtree to build a 'timeline' of future task execution,
80 and thus has no 'array switch' artifacts (by which both the vanilla
81 scheduler and RSDL/SD are affected).
82
83 CFS uses nanosecond granularity accounting and does not rely on any
84 jiffies or other HZ detail. Thus the CFS scheduler has no notion of
85 'timeslices' and has no heuristics whatsoever. There is only one
86 central tunable (you have to switch on CONFIG_SCHED_DEBUG):
87
88 /proc/sys/kernel/sched_granularity_ns
89
90 which can be used to tune the scheduler from 'desktop' (low
91 latencies) to 'server' (good batching) workloads. It defaults to a
92 setting suitable for desktop workloads. SCHED_BATCH is handled by the
93 CFS scheduler module too.
94
95 Due to its design, the CFS scheduler is not prone to any of the
96 'attacks' that exist today against the heuristics of the stock
97 scheduler: fiftyp.c, thud.c, chew.c, ring-test.c, massive_intr.c all
98 work fine and do not impact interactivity and produce the expected
99 behavior.
100
101 the CFS scheduler has a much stronger handling of nice levels and
102 SCHED_BATCH: both types of workloads should be isolated much more
103 agressively than under the vanilla scheduler.
104
105 ( another detail: due to nanosec accounting and timeline sorting,
106 sched_yield() support is very simple under CFS, and in fact under
107 CFS sched_yield() behaves much better than under any other
108 scheduler i have tested so far. )
109
110 - sched_rt.c implements SCHED_FIFO and SCHED_RR semantics, in a simpler
111 way than the vanilla scheduler does. It uses 100 runqueues (for all
112 100 RT priority levels, instead of 140 in the vanilla scheduler)
113 and it needs no expired array.
114
115 - reworked/sanitized SMP load-balancing: the runqueue-walking
116 assumptions are gone from the load-balancing code now, and
117 iterators of the scheduling modules are used. The balancing code got
118 quite a bit simpler as a result.
119
120
121Group scheduler extension to CFS
122================================
123
124Normally the scheduler operates on individual tasks and strives to provide
125fair CPU time to each task. Sometimes, it may be desirable to group tasks
126and provide fair CPU time to each such task group. For example, it may
127be desirable to first provide fair CPU time to each user on the system
128and then to each task belonging to a user.
129
130CONFIG_FAIR_GROUP_SCHED strives to achieve exactly that. It lets
131SCHED_NORMAL/BATCH tasks be be grouped and divides CPU time fairly among such
132groups. At present, there are two (mutually exclusive) mechanisms to group
133tasks for CPU bandwidth control purpose:
134
135 - Based on user id (CONFIG_FAIR_USER_SCHED)
136 In this option, tasks are grouped according to their user id.
137 - Based on "cgroup" pseudo filesystem (CONFIG_FAIR_CGROUP_SCHED)
138 This options lets the administrator create arbitrary groups
139 of tasks, using the "cgroup" pseudo filesystem. See
140 Documentation/cgroups.txt for more information about this
141 filesystem.
142 5
143Only one of these options to group tasks can be chosen and not both. 61. OVERVIEW
7
8CFS stands for "Completely Fair Scheduler," and is the new "desktop" process
9scheduler implemented by Ingo Molnar and merged in Linux 2.6.23. It is the
10replacement for the previous vanilla scheduler's SCHED_OTHER interactivity
11code.
12
1380% of CFS's design can be summed up in a single sentence: CFS basically models
14an "ideal, precise multi-tasking CPU" on real hardware.
15
16"Ideal multi-tasking CPU" is a (non-existent :-)) CPU that has 100% physical
17power and which can run each task at precise equal speed, in parallel, each at
181/nr_running speed. For example: if there are 2 tasks running, then it runs
19each at 50% physical power --- i.e., actually in parallel.
20
21On real hardware, we can run only a single task at once, so we have to
22introduce the concept of "virtual runtime." The virtual runtime of a task
23specifies when its next timeslice would start execution on the ideal
24multi-tasking CPU described above. In practice, the virtual runtime of a task
25is its actual runtime normalized to the total number of running tasks.
26
27
28
292. FEW IMPLEMENTATION DETAILS
30
31In CFS the virtual runtime is expressed and tracked via the per-task
32p->se.vruntime (nanosec-unit) value. This way, it's possible to accurately
33timestamp and measure the "expected CPU time" a task should have gotten.
34
35[ small detail: on "ideal" hardware, at any time all tasks would have the same
36 p->se.vruntime value --- i.e., tasks would execute simultaneously and no task
37 would ever get "out of balance" from the "ideal" share of CPU time. ]
38
39CFS's task picking logic is based on this p->se.vruntime value and it is thus
40very simple: it always tries to run the task with the smallest p->se.vruntime
41value (i.e., the task which executed least so far). CFS always tries to split
42up CPU time between runnable tasks as close to "ideal multitasking hardware" as
43possible.
44
45Most of the rest of CFS's design just falls out of this really simple concept,
46with a few add-on embellishments like nice levels, multiprocessing and various
47algorithm variants to recognize sleepers.
48
49
50
513. THE RBTREE
52
53CFS's design is quite radical: it does not use the old data structures for the
54runqueues, but it uses a time-ordered rbtree to build a "timeline" of future
55task execution, and thus has no "array switch" artifacts (by which both the
56previous vanilla scheduler and RSDL/SD are affected).
57
58CFS also maintains the rq->cfs.min_vruntime value, which is a monotonic
59increasing value tracking the smallest vruntime among all tasks in the
60runqueue. The total amount of work done by the system is tracked using
61min_vruntime; that value is used to place newly activated entities on the left
62side of the tree as much as possible.
63
64The total number of running tasks in the runqueue is accounted through the
65rq->cfs.load value, which is the sum of the weights of the tasks queued on the
66runqueue.
67
68CFS maintains a time-ordered rbtree, where all runnable tasks are sorted by the
69p->se.vruntime key (there is a subtraction using rq->cfs.min_vruntime to
70account for possible wraparounds). CFS picks the "leftmost" task from this
71tree and sticks to it.
72As the system progresses forwards, the executed tasks are put into the tree
73more and more to the right --- slowly but surely giving a chance for every task
74to become the "leftmost task" and thus get on the CPU within a deterministic
75amount of time.
76
77Summing up, CFS works like this: it runs a task a bit, and when the task
78schedules (or a scheduler tick happens) the task's CPU usage is "accounted
79for": the (small) time it just spent using the physical CPU is added to
80p->se.vruntime. Once p->se.vruntime gets high enough so that another task
81becomes the "leftmost task" of the time-ordered rbtree it maintains (plus a
82small amount of "granularity" distance relative to the leftmost task so that we
83do not over-schedule tasks and trash the cache), then the new leftmost task is
84picked and the current task is preempted.
85
86
87
884. SOME FEATURES OF CFS
89
90CFS uses nanosecond granularity accounting and does not rely on any jiffies or
91other HZ detail. Thus the CFS scheduler has no notion of "timeslices" in the
92way the previous scheduler had, and has no heuristics whatsoever. There is
93only one central tunable (you have to switch on CONFIG_SCHED_DEBUG):
94
95 /proc/sys/kernel/sched_granularity_ns
96
97which can be used to tune the scheduler from "desktop" (i.e., low latencies) to
98"server" (i.e., good batching) workloads. It defaults to a setting suitable
99for desktop workloads. SCHED_BATCH is handled by the CFS scheduler module too.
100
101Due to its design, the CFS scheduler is not prone to any of the "attacks" that
102exist today against the heuristics of the stock scheduler: fiftyp.c, thud.c,
103chew.c, ring-test.c, massive_intr.c all work fine and do not impact
104interactivity and produce the expected behavior.
105
106The CFS scheduler has a much stronger handling of nice levels and SCHED_BATCH
107than the previous vanilla scheduler: both types of workloads are isolated much
108more aggressively.
109
110SMP load-balancing has been reworked/sanitized: the runqueue-walking
111assumptions are gone from the load-balancing code now, and iterators of the
112scheduling modules are used. The balancing code got quite a bit simpler as a
113result.
114
115
116
1175. Scheduling policies
118
119CFS implements three scheduling policies:
120
121 - SCHED_NORMAL (traditionally called SCHED_OTHER): The scheduling
122 policy that is used for regular tasks.
123
124 - SCHED_BATCH: Does not preempt nearly as often as regular tasks
125 would, thereby allowing tasks to run longer and make better use of
126 caches but at the cost of interactivity. This is well suited for
127 batch jobs.
128
129 - SCHED_IDLE: This is even weaker than nice 19, but its not a true
130 idle timer scheduler in order to avoid to get into priority
131 inversion problems which would deadlock the machine.
132
133SCHED_FIFO/_RR are implemented in sched_rt.c and are as specified by
134POSIX.
135
136The command chrt from util-linux-ng 2.13.1.1 can set all of these except
137SCHED_IDLE.
144 138
145Group scheduler tunables:
146 139
147When CONFIG_FAIR_USER_SCHED is defined, a directory is created in sysfs for 140
148each new user and a "cpu_share" file is added in that directory. 1416. SCHEDULING CLASSES
142
143The new CFS scheduler has been designed in such a way to introduce "Scheduling
144Classes," an extensible hierarchy of scheduler modules. These modules
145encapsulate scheduling policy details and are handled by the scheduler core
146without the core code assuming too much about them.
147
148sched_fair.c implements the CFS scheduler described above.
149
150sched_rt.c implements SCHED_FIFO and SCHED_RR semantics, in a simpler way than
151the previous vanilla scheduler did. It uses 100 runqueues (for all 100 RT
152priority levels, instead of 140 in the previous scheduler) and it needs no
153expired array.
154
155Scheduling classes are implemented through the sched_class structure, which
156contains hooks to functions that must be called whenever an interesting event
157occurs.
158
159This is the (partial) list of the hooks:
160
161 - enqueue_task(...)
162
163 Called when a task enters a runnable state.
164 It puts the scheduling entity (task) into the red-black tree and
165 increments the nr_running variable.
166
167 - dequeue_tree(...)
168
169 When a task is no longer runnable, this function is called to keep the
170 corresponding scheduling entity out of the red-black tree. It decrements
171 the nr_running variable.
172
173 - yield_task(...)
174
175 This function is basically just a dequeue followed by an enqueue, unless the
176 compat_yield sysctl is turned on; in that case, it places the scheduling
177 entity at the right-most end of the red-black tree.
178
179 - check_preempt_curr(...)
180
181 This function checks if a task that entered the runnable state should
182 preempt the currently running task.
183
184 - pick_next_task(...)
185
186 This function chooses the most appropriate task eligible to run next.
187
188 - set_curr_task(...)
189
190 This function is called when a task changes its scheduling class or changes
191 its task group.
192
193 - task_tick(...)
194
195 This function is mostly called from time tick functions; it might lead to
196 process switch. This drives the running preemption.
197
198 - task_new(...)
199
200 The core scheduler gives the scheduling module an opportunity to manage new
201 task startup. The CFS scheduling module uses it for group scheduling, while
202 the scheduling module for a real-time task does not use it.
203
204
205
2067. GROUP SCHEDULER EXTENSIONS TO CFS
207
208Normally, the scheduler operates on individual tasks and strives to provide
209fair CPU time to each task. Sometimes, it may be desirable to group tasks and
210provide fair CPU time to each such task group. For example, it may be
211desirable to first provide fair CPU time to each user on the system and then to
212each task belonging to a user.
213
214CONFIG_GROUP_SCHED strives to achieve exactly that. It lets tasks to be
215grouped and divides CPU time fairly among such groups.
216
217CONFIG_RT_GROUP_SCHED permits to group real-time (i.e., SCHED_FIFO and
218SCHED_RR) tasks.
219
220CONFIG_FAIR_GROUP_SCHED permits to group CFS (i.e., SCHED_NORMAL and
221SCHED_BATCH) tasks.
222
223At present, there are two (mutually exclusive) mechanisms to group tasks for
224CPU bandwidth control purposes:
225
226 - Based on user id (CONFIG_USER_SCHED)
227
228 With this option, tasks are grouped according to their user id.
229
230 - Based on "cgroup" pseudo filesystem (CONFIG_CGROUP_SCHED)
231
232 This options needs CONFIG_CGROUPS to be defined, and lets the administrator
233 create arbitrary groups of tasks, using the "cgroup" pseudo filesystem. See
234 Documentation/cgroups.txt for more information about this filesystem.
235
236Only one of these options to group tasks can be chosen and not both.
237
238When CONFIG_USER_SCHED is defined, a directory is created in sysfs for each new
239user and a "cpu_share" file is added in that directory.
149 240
150 # cd /sys/kernel/uids 241 # cd /sys/kernel/uids
151 # cat 512/cpu_share # Display user 512's CPU share 242 # cat 512/cpu_share # Display user 512's CPU share
@@ -155,16 +246,14 @@ each new user and a "cpu_share" file is added in that directory.
155 2048 246 2048
156 # 247 #
157 248
158CPU bandwidth between two users are divided in the ratio of their CPU shares. 249CPU bandwidth between two users is divided in the ratio of their CPU shares.
159For ex: if you would like user "root" to get twice the bandwidth of user 250For example: if you would like user "root" to get twice the bandwidth of user
160"guest", then set the cpu_share for both the users such that "root"'s 251"guest," then set the cpu_share for both the users such that "root"'s cpu_share
161cpu_share is twice "guest"'s cpu_share 252is twice "guest"'s cpu_share.
162
163 253
164When CONFIG_FAIR_CGROUP_SCHED is defined, a "cpu.shares" file is created 254When CONFIG_CGROUP_SCHED is defined, a "cpu.shares" file is created for each
165for each group created using the pseudo filesystem. See example steps 255group created using the pseudo filesystem. See example steps below to create
166below to create task groups and modify their CPU share using the "cgroups" 256task groups and modify their CPU share using the "cgroups" pseudo filesystem.
167pseudo filesystem
168 257
169 # mkdir /dev/cpuctl 258 # mkdir /dev/cpuctl
170 # mount -t cgroup -ocpu none /dev/cpuctl 259 # mount -t cgroup -ocpu none /dev/cpuctl
diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid
index 37796fe45bd0..eaa4801f2ce6 100644
--- a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid
+++ b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid
@@ -409,7 +409,7 @@ i. Function reordering so that inline functions are defined before they
409 megaraid_mbox_prepare_pthru, megaraid_mbox_prepare_epthru, 409 megaraid_mbox_prepare_pthru, megaraid_mbox_prepare_epthru,
410 megaraid_busywait_mbox 410 megaraid_busywait_mbox
411 411
412 - Andrew Morton <akpm@osdl.org>, 08.19.2004 412 - Andrew Morton, 08.19.2004
413 linux-scsi mailing list 413 linux-scsi mailing list
414 414
415 "Something else to clean up after inclusion: every instance of an 415 "Something else to clean up after inclusion: every instance of an
@@ -471,13 +471,13 @@ vi. Add support for 64-bit applications. Current drivers assume only
471vii. Move the function declarations for the management module from 471vii. Move the function declarations for the management module from
472 megaraid_mm.h to megaraid_mm.c 472 megaraid_mm.h to megaraid_mm.c
473 473
474 - Andrew Morton <akpm@osdl.org>, 08.19.2004 474 - Andrew Morton, 08.19.2004
475 linux-scsi mailing list 475 linux-scsi mailing list
476 476
477viii. Change default values for MEGARAID_NEWGEN, MEGARAID_MM, and 477viii. Change default values for MEGARAID_NEWGEN, MEGARAID_MM, and
478 MEGARAID_MAILBOX to 'n' in Kconfig.megaraid 478 MEGARAID_MAILBOX to 'n' in Kconfig.megaraid
479 479
480 - Andrew Morton <akpm@osdl.org>, 08.19.2004 480 - Andrew Morton, 08.19.2004
481 linux-scsi mailing list 481 linux-scsi mailing list
482 482
483ix. replace udelay with msleep 483ix. replace udelay with msleep
diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt
index 75143f0c23b6..38d324d62b25 100644
--- a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt
+++ b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt
@@ -436,6 +436,42 @@ Other:
436 was updated to remove all vports for the fc_host as well. 436 was updated to remove all vports for the fc_host as well.
437 437
438 438
439Transport supplied functions
440----------------------------
441
442The following functions are supplied by the FC-transport for use by LLDs.
443
444 fc_vport_create - create a vport
445 fc_vport_terminate - detach and remove a vport
446
447Details:
448
449/**
450 * fc_vport_create - Admin App or LLDD requests creation of a vport
451 * @shost: scsi host the virtual port is connected to.
452 * @ids: The world wide names, FC4 port roles, etc for
453 * the virtual port.
454 *
455 * Notes:
456 * This routine assumes no locks are held on entry.
457 */
458struct fc_vport *
459fc_vport_create(struct Scsi_Host *shost, struct fc_vport_identifiers *ids)
460
461/**
462 * fc_vport_terminate - Admin App or LLDD requests termination of a vport
463 * @vport: fc_vport to be terminated
464 *
465 * Calls the LLDD vport_delete() function, then deallocates and removes
466 * the vport from the shost and object tree.
467 *
468 * Notes:
469 * This routine assumes no locks are held on entry.
470 */
471int
472fc_vport_terminate(struct fc_vport *vport)
473
474
439Credits 475Credits
440======= 476=======
441The following people have contributed to this document: 477The following people have contributed to this document:
diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt
index b117e42a6166..e0e54a27fc10 100644
--- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt
+++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt
@@ -746,8 +746,10 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
746 Module snd-hda-intel 746 Module snd-hda-intel
747 -------------------- 747 --------------------
748 748
749 Module for Intel HD Audio (ICH6, ICH6M, ESB2, ICH7, ICH8), 749 Module for Intel HD Audio (ICH6, ICH6M, ESB2, ICH7, ICH8, ICH9, ICH10,
750 ATI SB450, SB600, RS600, 750 PCH, SCH),
751 ATI SB450, SB600, R600, RS600, RS690, RS780, RV610, RV620,
752 RV630, RV635, RV670, RV770,
751 VIA VT8251/VT8237A, 753 VIA VT8251/VT8237A,
752 SIS966, ULI M5461 754 SIS966, ULI M5461
753 755
@@ -807,6 +809,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
807 ALC260 809 ALC260
808 hp HP machines 810 hp HP machines
809 hp-3013 HP machines (3013-variant) 811 hp-3013 HP machines (3013-variant)
812 hp-dc7600 HP DC7600
810 fujitsu Fujitsu S7020 813 fujitsu Fujitsu S7020
811 acer Acer TravelMate 814 acer Acer TravelMate
812 will Will laptops (PB V7900) 815 will Will laptops (PB V7900)
@@ -828,8 +831,11 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
828 hippo Hippo (ATI) with jack detection, Sony UX-90s 831 hippo Hippo (ATI) with jack detection, Sony UX-90s
829 hippo_1 Hippo (Benq) with jack detection 832 hippo_1 Hippo (Benq) with jack detection
830 sony-assamd Sony ASSAMD 833 sony-assamd Sony ASSAMD
834 toshiba-s06 Toshiba S06
835 toshiba-rx1 Toshiba RX1
831 ultra Samsung Q1 Ultra Vista model 836 ultra Samsung Q1 Ultra Vista model
832 lenovo-3000 Lenovo 3000 y410 837 lenovo-3000 Lenovo 3000 y410
838 nec NEC Versa S9100
833 basic fixed pin assignment w/o SPDIF 839 basic fixed pin assignment w/o SPDIF
834 auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) 840 auto auto-config reading BIOS (default)
835 841
@@ -838,6 +844,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
838 3stack 3-stack model 844 3stack 3-stack model
839 toshiba Toshiba A205 845 toshiba Toshiba A205
840 acer Acer laptops 846 acer Acer laptops
847 acer-aspire Acer Aspire One
841 dell Dell OEM laptops (Vostro 1200) 848 dell Dell OEM laptops (Vostro 1200)
842 zepto Zepto laptops 849 zepto Zepto laptops
843 test for testing/debugging purpose, almost all controls can 850 test for testing/debugging purpose, almost all controls can
@@ -847,6 +854,9 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
847 854
848 ALC269 855 ALC269
849 basic Basic preset 856 basic Basic preset
857 quanta Quanta FL1
858 eeepc-p703 ASUS Eeepc P703 P900A
859 eeepc-p901 ASUS Eeepc P901 S101
850 860
851 ALC662/663 861 ALC662/663
852 3stack-dig 3-stack (2-channel) with SPDIF 862 3stack-dig 3-stack (2-channel) with SPDIF
@@ -856,10 +866,17 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
856 lenovo-101e Lenovo laptop 866 lenovo-101e Lenovo laptop
857 eeepc-p701 ASUS Eeepc P701 867 eeepc-p701 ASUS Eeepc P701
858 eeepc-ep20 ASUS Eeepc EP20 868 eeepc-ep20 ASUS Eeepc EP20
869 ecs ECS/Foxconn mobo
859 m51va ASUS M51VA 870 m51va ASUS M51VA
860 g71v ASUS G71V 871 g71v ASUS G71V
861 h13 ASUS H13 872 h13 ASUS H13
862 g50v ASUS G50V 873 g50v ASUS G50V
874 asus-mode1 ASUS
875 asus-mode2 ASUS
876 asus-mode3 ASUS
877 asus-mode4 ASUS
878 asus-mode5 ASUS
879 asus-mode6 ASUS
863 auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) 880 auto auto-config reading BIOS (default)
864 881
865 ALC882/885 882 ALC882/885
@@ -891,12 +908,14 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
891 lenovo-101e Lenovo 101E 908 lenovo-101e Lenovo 101E
892 lenovo-nb0763 Lenovo NB0763 909 lenovo-nb0763 Lenovo NB0763
893 lenovo-ms7195-dig Lenovo MS7195 910 lenovo-ms7195-dig Lenovo MS7195
911 lenovo-sky Lenovo Sky
894 haier-w66 Haier W66 912 haier-w66 Haier W66
895 3stack-hp HP machines with 3stack (Lucknow, Samba boards) 913 3stack-hp HP machines with 3stack (Lucknow, Samba boards)
896 6stack-dell Dell machines with 6stack (Inspiron 530) 914 6stack-dell Dell machines with 6stack (Inspiron 530)
897 mitac Mitac 8252D 915 mitac Mitac 8252D
898 clevo-m720 Clevo M720 laptop series 916 clevo-m720 Clevo M720 laptop series
899 fujitsu-pi2515 Fujitsu AMILO Pi2515 917 fujitsu-pi2515 Fujitsu AMILO Pi2515
918 3stack-6ch-intel Intel DG33* boards
900 auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) 919 auto auto-config reading BIOS (default)
901 920
902 ALC861/660 921 ALC861/660
@@ -929,7 +948,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
929 allout 5-jack in back, 2-jack in front, SPDIF out 948 allout 5-jack in back, 2-jack in front, SPDIF out
930 auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) 949 auto auto-config reading BIOS (default)
931 950
932 AD1882 951 AD1882 / AD1882A
933 3stack 3-stack mode (default) 952 3stack 3-stack mode (default)
934 6stack 6-stack mode 953 6stack 6-stack mode
935 954
@@ -1079,7 +1098,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
1079 register value without FIFO size correction as the current 1098 register value without FIFO size correction as the current
1080 DMA pointer. position_fix=2 will make the driver to use 1099 DMA pointer. position_fix=2 will make the driver to use
1081 the position buffer instead of reading SD_LPIB register. 1100 the position buffer instead of reading SD_LPIB register.
1082 (Usually SD_LPLIB register is more accurate than the 1101 (Usually SD_LPIB register is more accurate than the
1083 position buffer.) 1102 position buffer.)
1084 1103
1085 NB: If you get many "azx_get_response timeout" messages at 1104 NB: If you get many "azx_get_response timeout" messages at
@@ -1166,6 +1185,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
1166 * Event Electronics, EZ8 1185 * Event Electronics, EZ8
1167 * Digigram VX442 1186 * Digigram VX442
1168 * Lionstracs, Mediastaton 1187 * Lionstracs, Mediastaton
1188 * Terrasoniq TS 88
1169 1189
1170 model - Use the given board model, one of the following: 1190 model - Use the given board model, one of the following:
1171 delta1010, dio2496, delta66, delta44, audiophile, delta410, 1191 delta1010, dio2496, delta66, delta44, audiophile, delta410,
@@ -1200,7 +1220,10 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
1200 * TerraTec Phase 22 1220 * TerraTec Phase 22
1201 * TerraTec Phase 28 1221 * TerraTec Phase 28
1202 * AudioTrak Prodigy 7.1 1222 * AudioTrak Prodigy 7.1
1203 * AudioTrak Prodigy 7.1LT 1223 * AudioTrak Prodigy 7.1 LT
1224 * AudioTrak Prodigy 7.1 XT
1225 * AudioTrak Prodigy 7.1 HIFI
1226 * AudioTrak Prodigy 7.1 HD2
1204 * AudioTrak Prodigy 192 1227 * AudioTrak Prodigy 192
1205 * Pontis MS300 1228 * Pontis MS300
1206 * Albatron K8X800 Pro II 1229 * Albatron K8X800 Pro II
@@ -1211,12 +1234,16 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
1211 * Shuttle SN25P 1234 * Shuttle SN25P
1212 * Onkyo SE-90PCI 1235 * Onkyo SE-90PCI
1213 * Onkyo SE-200PCI 1236 * Onkyo SE-200PCI
1237 * ESI Juli@
1238 * Hercules Fortissimo IV
1239 * EGO-SYS WaveTerminal 192M
1214 1240
1215 model - Use the given board model, one of the following: 1241 model - Use the given board model, one of the following:
1216 revo51, revo71, amp2000, prodigy71, prodigy71lt, 1242 revo51, revo71, amp2000, prodigy71, prodigy71lt,
1217 prodigy192, aureon51, aureon71, universe, ap192, 1243 prodigy71xt, prodigy71hifi, prodigyhd2, prodigy192,
1218 k8x800, phase22, phase28, ms300, av710, se200pci, 1244 juli, aureon51, aureon71, universe, ap192, k8x800,
1219 se90pci 1245 phase22, phase28, ms300, av710, se200pci, se90pci,
1246 fortissimo4, sn25p, WT192M
1220 1247
1221 This module supports multiple cards and autoprobe. 1248 This module supports multiple cards and autoprobe.
1222 1249
@@ -1255,7 +1282,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
1255 1282
1256 Module for AC'97 motherboards from Intel and compatibles. 1283 Module for AC'97 motherboards from Intel and compatibles.
1257 * Intel i810/810E, i815, i820, i830, i84x, MX440 1284 * Intel i810/810E, i815, i820, i830, i84x, MX440
1258 ICH5, ICH6, ICH7, ESB2 1285 ICH5, ICH6, ICH7, 6300ESB, ESB2
1259 * SiS 7012 (SiS 735) 1286 * SiS 7012 (SiS 735)
1260 * NVidia NForce, NForce2, NForce3, MCP04, CK804 1287 * NVidia NForce, NForce2, NForce3, MCP04, CK804
1261 CK8, CK8S, MCP501 1288 CK8, CK8S, MCP501
@@ -1951,6 +1978,8 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
1951 * CHIC True Sound 4Dwave 1978 * CHIC True Sound 4Dwave
1952 * Shark Predator4D-PCI 1979 * Shark Predator4D-PCI
1953 * Jaton SonicWave 4D 1980 * Jaton SonicWave 4D
1981 * SiS SI7018 PCI Audio
1982 * Hoontech SoundTrack Digital 4DWave NX
1954 1983
1955 pcm_channels - max channels (voices) reserved for PCM 1984 pcm_channels - max channels (voices) reserved for PCM
1956 wavetable_size - max wavetable size in kB (4-?kb) 1985 wavetable_size - max wavetable size in kB (4-?kb)
@@ -1966,12 +1995,25 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
1966 1995
1967 vid - Vendor ID for the device (optional) 1996 vid - Vendor ID for the device (optional)
1968 pid - Product ID for the device (optional) 1997 pid - Product ID for the device (optional)
1998 nrpacks - Max. number of packets per URB (default: 8)
1999 async_unlink - Use async unlink mode (default: yes)
1969 device_setup - Device specific magic number (optional) 2000 device_setup - Device specific magic number (optional)
1970 - Influence depends on the device 2001 - Influence depends on the device
1971 - Default: 0x0000 2002 - Default: 0x0000
2003 ignore_ctl_error - Ignore any USB-controller regarding mixer
2004 interface (default: no)
1972 2005
1973 This module supports multiple devices, autoprobe and hotplugging. 2006 This module supports multiple devices, autoprobe and hotplugging.
1974 2007
2008 NB: nrpacks parameter can be modified dynamically via sysfs.
2009 Don't put the value over 20. Changing via sysfs has no sanity
2010 check.
2011 NB: async_unlink=0 would cause Oops. It remains just for
2012 debugging purpose (if any).
2013 NB: ignore_ctl_error=1 may help when you get an error at accessing
2014 the mixer element such as URB error -22. This happens on some
2015 buggy USB device or the controller.
2016
1975 Module snd-usb-caiaq 2017 Module snd-usb-caiaq
1976 -------------------- 2018 --------------------
1977 2019
@@ -2078,7 +2120,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
2078 ------------------- 2120 -------------------
2079 2121
2080 Module for sound cards based on the Asus AV100/AV200 chips, 2122 Module for sound cards based on the Asus AV100/AV200 chips,
2081 i.e., Xonar D1, DX, D2 and D2X. 2123 i.e., Xonar D1, DX, D2, D2X and HDAV1.3 (Deluxe).
2082 2124
2083 This module supports autoprobe and multiple cards. 2125 This module supports autoprobe and multiple cards.
2084 2126
diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl b/Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl
index e13c4e67029f..87a7c07ab658 100644
--- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl
+++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl
@@ -5073,8 +5073,7 @@ struct _snd_pcm_runtime {
5073 with <constant>SNDRV_DMA_TYPE_CONTINUOUS</constant> type and the 5073 with <constant>SNDRV_DMA_TYPE_CONTINUOUS</constant> type and the
5074 <function>snd_dma_continuous_data(GFP_KERNEL)</function> device pointer, 5074 <function>snd_dma_continuous_data(GFP_KERNEL)</function> device pointer,
5075 where <constant>GFP_KERNEL</constant> is the kernel allocation flag to 5075 where <constant>GFP_KERNEL</constant> is the kernel allocation flag to
5076 use. For the SBUS, <constant>SNDRV_DMA_TYPE_SBUS</constant> and 5076 use.
5077 <function>snd_dma_sbus_data(sbus_dev)</function> are used instead.
5078 For the PCI scatter-gather buffers, use 5077 For the PCI scatter-gather buffers, use
5079 <constant>SNDRV_DMA_TYPE_DEV_SG</constant> with 5078 <constant>SNDRV_DMA_TYPE_DEV_SG</constant> with
5080 <function>snd_dma_pci_data(pci)</function> 5079 <function>snd_dma_pci_data(pci)</function>
@@ -6135,44 +6134,58 @@ struct _snd_pcm_runtime {
6135 </para> 6134 </para>
6136 </section> 6135 </section>
6137 6136
6138 <section id="useful-functions-snd-assert"> 6137 <section id="useful-functions-snd-bug">
6139 <title><function>snd_assert()</function></title> 6138 <title><function>snd_BUG()</function></title>
6140 <para> 6139 <para>
6141 <function>snd_assert()</function> macro is similar with the 6140 It shows the <computeroutput>BUG?</computeroutput> message and
6142 normal <function>assert()</function> macro. For example, 6141 stack trace as well as <function>snd_BUG_ON</function> at the point.
6142 It's useful to show that a fatal error happens there.
6143 </para>
6144 <para>
6145 When no debug flag is set, this macro is ignored.
6146 </para>
6147 </section>
6148
6149 <section id="useful-functions-snd-bug-on">
6150 <title><function>snd_BUG_ON()</function></title>
6151 <para>
6152 <function>snd_BUG_ON()</function> macro is similar with
6153 <function>WARN_ON()</function> macro. For example,
6143 6154
6144 <informalexample> 6155 <informalexample>
6145 <programlisting> 6156 <programlisting>
6146<![CDATA[ 6157<![CDATA[
6147 snd_assert(pointer != NULL, return -EINVAL); 6158 snd_BUG_ON(!pointer);
6148]]> 6159]]>
6149 </programlisting> 6160 </programlisting>
6150 </informalexample> 6161 </informalexample>
6151 </para>
6152 6162
6153 <para> 6163 or it can be used as the condition,
6154 The first argument is the expression to evaluate, and the 6164 <informalexample>
6155 second argument is the action if it fails. When 6165 <programlisting>
6156 <constant>CONFIG_SND_DEBUG</constant>, is set, it will show an 6166<![CDATA[
6157 error message such as <computeroutput>BUG? (xxx)</computeroutput> 6167 if (snd_BUG_ON(non_zero_is_bug))
6158 together with stack trace. 6168 return -EINVAL;
6159 </para> 6169]]>
6160 <para> 6170 </programlisting>
6161 When no debug flag is set, this macro is ignored. 6171 </informalexample>
6162 </para>
6163 </section>
6164 6172
6165 <section id="useful-functions-snd-bug">
6166 <title><function>snd_BUG()</function></title>
6167 <para>
6168 It shows the <computeroutput>BUG?</computeroutput> message and
6169 stack trace as well as <function>snd_assert</function> at the point.
6170 It's useful to show that a fatal error happens there.
6171 </para> 6173 </para>
6174
6172 <para> 6175 <para>
6173 When no debug flag is set, this macro is ignored. 6176 The macro takes an conditional expression to evaluate.
6177 When <constant>CONFIG_SND_DEBUG</constant>, is set, the
6178 expression is actually evaluated. If it's non-zero, it shows
6179 the warning message such as
6180 <computeroutput>BUG? (xxx)</computeroutput>
6181 normally followed by stack trace. It returns the evaluated
6182 value.
6183 When no <constant>CONFIG_SND_DEBUG</constant> is set, this
6184 macro always returns zero.
6174 </para> 6185 </para>
6186
6175 </section> 6187 </section>
6188
6176 </chapter> 6189 </chapter>
6177 6190
6178 6191
diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/dapm.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/dapm.txt
index b2ed6983f40d..46f9684d0b29 100644
--- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/dapm.txt
+++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/dapm.txt
@@ -135,11 +135,7 @@ when the Mic is inserted:-
135 135
136static int spitz_mic_bias(struct snd_soc_dapm_widget* w, int event) 136static int spitz_mic_bias(struct snd_soc_dapm_widget* w, int event)
137{ 137{
138 if(SND_SOC_DAPM_EVENT_ON(event)) 138 gpio_set_value(SPITZ_GPIO_MIC_BIAS, SND_SOC_DAPM_EVENT_ON(event));
139 set_scoop_gpio(&spitzscoop2_device.dev, SPITZ_SCP2_MIC_BIAS);
140 else
141 reset_scoop_gpio(&spitzscoop2_device.dev, SPITZ_SCP2_MIC_BIAS);
142
143 return 0; 139 return 0;
144} 140}
145 141
@@ -269,11 +265,7 @@ powered only when the spk is in use.
269/* turn speaker amplifier on/off depending on use */ 265/* turn speaker amplifier on/off depending on use */
270static int corgi_amp_event(struct snd_soc_dapm_widget *w, int event) 266static int corgi_amp_event(struct snd_soc_dapm_widget *w, int event)
271{ 267{
272 if (SND_SOC_DAPM_EVENT_ON(event)) 268 gpio_set_value(CORGI_GPIO_APM_ON, SND_SOC_DAPM_EVENT_ON(event));
273 set_scoop_gpio(&corgiscoop_device.dev, CORGI_SCP_APM_ON);
274 else
275 reset_scoop_gpio(&corgiscoop_device.dev, CORGI_SCP_APM_ON);
276
277 return 0; 269 return 0;
278} 270}
279 271
diff --git a/Documentation/sparc/sbus_drivers.txt b/Documentation/sparc/sbus_drivers.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index eb1e28ad8822..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/sparc/sbus_drivers.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,309 +0,0 @@
1
2 Writing SBUS Drivers
3
4 David S. Miller (davem@redhat.com)
5
6 The SBUS driver interfaces of the Linux kernel have been
7revamped completely for 2.4.x for several reasons. Foremost were
8performance and complexity concerns. This document details these
9new interfaces and how they are used to write an SBUS device driver.
10
11 SBUS drivers need to include <asm/sbus.h> to get access
12to functions and structures described here.
13
14 Probing and Detection
15
16 Each SBUS device inside the machine is described by a
17structure called "struct sbus_dev". Likewise, each SBUS bus
18found in the system is described by a "struct sbus_bus". For
19each SBUS bus, the devices underneath are hung in a tree-like
20fashion off of the bus structure.
21
22 The SBUS device structure contains enough information
23for you to implement your device probing algorithm and obtain
24the bits necessary to run your device. The most commonly
25used members of this structure, and their typical usage,
26will be detailed below.
27
28 Here is a piece of skeleton code for performing a device
29probe in an SBUS driver under Linux:
30
31 static int __devinit mydevice_probe_one(struct sbus_dev *sdev)
32 {
33 struct mysdevice *mp = kzalloc(sizeof(*mp), GFP_KERNEL);
34
35 if (!mp)
36 return -ENODEV;
37
38 ...
39 dev_set_drvdata(&sdev->ofdev.dev, mp);
40 return 0;
41 ...
42 }
43
44 static int __devinit mydevice_probe(struct of_device *dev,
45 const struct of_device_id *match)
46 {
47 struct sbus_dev *sdev = to_sbus_device(&dev->dev);
48
49 return mydevice_probe_one(sdev);
50 }
51
52 static int __devexit mydevice_remove(struct of_device *dev)
53 {
54 struct sbus_dev *sdev = to_sbus_device(&dev->dev);
55 struct mydevice *mp = dev_get_drvdata(&dev->dev);
56
57 return mydevice_remove_one(sdev, mp);
58 }
59
60 static struct of_device_id mydevice_match[] = {
61 {
62 .name = "mydevice",
63 },
64 {},
65 };
66
67 MODULE_DEVICE_TABLE(of, mydevice_match);
68
69 static struct of_platform_driver mydevice_driver = {
70 .match_table = mydevice_match,
71 .probe = mydevice_probe,
72 .remove = __devexit_p(mydevice_remove),
73 .driver = {
74 .name = "mydevice",
75 },
76 };
77
78 static int __init mydevice_init(void)
79 {
80 return of_register_driver(&mydevice_driver, &sbus_bus_type);
81 }
82
83 static void __exit mydevice_exit(void)
84 {
85 of_unregister_driver(&mydevice_driver);
86 }
87
88 module_init(mydevice_init);
89 module_exit(mydevice_exit);
90
91 The mydevice_match table is a series of entries which
92describes what SBUS devices your driver is meant for. In the
93simplest case you specify a string for the 'name' field. Every
94SBUS device with a 'name' property matching your string will
95be passed one-by-one to your .probe method.
96
97 You should store away your device private state structure
98pointer in the drvdata area so that you can retrieve it later on
99in your .remove method.
100
101 Any memory allocated, registers mapped, IRQs registered,
102etc. must be undone by your .remove method so that all resources
103of your device are released by the time it returns.
104
105 You should _NOT_ use the for_each_sbus(), for_each_sbusdev(),
106and for_all_sbusdev() interfaces. They are deprecated, will be
107removed, and no new driver should reference them ever.
108
109 Mapping and Accessing I/O Registers
110
111 Each SBUS device structure contains an array of descriptors
112which describe each register set. We abuse struct resource for that.
113They each correspond to the "reg" properties provided by the OBP firmware.
114
115 Before you can access your device's registers you must map
116them. And later if you wish to shutdown your driver (for module
117unload or similar) you must unmap them. You must treat them as
118a resource, which you allocate (map) before using and free up
119(unmap) when you are done with it.
120
121 The mapping information is stored in an opaque value
122typed as an "unsigned long". This is the type of the return value
123of the mapping interface, and the arguments to the unmapping
124interface. Let's say you want to map the first set of registers.
125Perhaps part of your driver software state structure looks like:
126
127 struct mydevice {
128 unsigned long control_regs;
129 ...
130 struct sbus_dev *sdev;
131 ...
132 };
133
134 At initialization time you then use the sbus_ioremap
135interface to map in your registers, like so:
136
137 static void init_one_mydevice(struct sbus_dev *sdev)
138 {
139 struct mydevice *mp;
140 ...
141
142 mp->control_regs = sbus_ioremap(&sdev->resource[0], 0,
143 CONTROL_REGS_SIZE, "mydevice regs");
144 if (!mp->control_regs) {
145 /* Failure, cleanup and return. */
146 }
147 }
148
149 Second argument to sbus_ioremap is an offset for
150cranky devices with broken OBP PROM. The sbus_ioremap uses only
151a start address and flags from the resource structure.
152Therefore it is possible to use the same resource to map
153several sets of registers or even to fabricate a resource
154structure if driver gets physical address from some private place.
155This practice is discouraged though. Use whatever OBP PROM
156provided to you.
157
158 And here is how you might unmap these registers later at
159driver shutdown or module unload time, using the sbus_iounmap
160interface:
161
162 static void mydevice_unmap_regs(struct mydevice *mp)
163 {
164 sbus_iounmap(mp->control_regs, CONTROL_REGS_SIZE);
165 }
166
167 Finally, to actually access your registers there are 6
168interface routines at your disposal. Accesses are byte (8 bit),
169word (16 bit), or longword (32 bit) sized. Here they are:
170
171 u8 sbus_readb(unsigned long reg) /* read byte */
172 u16 sbus_readw(unsigned long reg) /* read word */
173 u32 sbus_readl(unsigned long reg) /* read longword */
174 void sbus_writeb(u8 value, unsigned long reg) /* write byte */
175 void sbus_writew(u16 value, unsigned long reg) /* write word */
176 void sbus_writel(u32 value, unsigned long reg) /* write longword */
177
178 So, let's say your device has a control register of some sort
179at offset zero. The following might implement resetting your device:
180
181 #define CONTROL 0x00UL
182
183 #define CONTROL_RESET 0x00000001 /* Reset hardware */
184
185 static void mydevice_reset(struct mydevice *mp)
186 {
187 sbus_writel(CONTROL_RESET, mp->regs + CONTROL);
188 }
189
190 Or perhaps there is a data port register at an offset of
19116 bytes which allows you to read bytes from a fifo in the device:
192
193 #define DATA 0x10UL
194
195 static u8 mydevice_get_byte(struct mydevice *mp)
196 {
197 return sbus_readb(mp->regs + DATA);
198 }
199
200 It's pretty straightforward, and clueful readers may have
201noticed that these interfaces mimick the PCI interfaces of the
202Linux kernel. This was not by accident.
203
204 WARNING:
205
206 DO NOT try to treat these opaque register mapping
207 values as a memory mapped pointer to some structure
208 which you can dereference.
209
210 It may be memory mapped, it may not be. In fact it
211 could be a physical address, or it could be the time
212 of day xor'd with 0xdeadbeef. :-)
213
214 Whatever it is, it's an implementation detail. The
215 interface was done this way to shield the driver
216 author from such complexities.
217
218 Doing DVMA
219
220 SBUS devices can perform DMA transactions in a way similar
221to PCI but dissimilar to ISA, e.g. DMA masters supply address.
222In contrast to PCI, however, that address (a bus address) is
223translated by IOMMU before a memory access is performed and therefore
224it is virtual. Sun calls this procedure DVMA.
225
226 Linux supports two styles of using SBUS DVMA: "consistent memory"
227and "streaming DVMA". CPU view of consistent memory chunk is, well,
228consistent with a view of a device. Think of it as an uncached memory.
229Typically this way of doing DVMA is not very fast and drivers use it
230mostly for control blocks or queues. On some CPUs we cannot flush or
231invalidate individual pages or cache lines and doing explicit flushing
232over ever little byte in every control block would be wasteful.
233
234Streaming DVMA is a preferred way to transfer large amounts of data.
235This process works in the following way:
2361. a CPU stops accessing a certain part of memory,
237 flushes its caches covering that memory;
2382. a device does DVMA accesses, then posts an interrupt;
2393. CPU invalidates its caches and starts to access the memory.
240
241A single streaming DVMA operation can touch several discontiguous
242regions of a virtual bus address space. This is called a scatter-gather
243DVMA.
244
245[TBD: Why do not we neither Solaris attempt to map disjoint pages
246into a single virtual chunk with the help of IOMMU, so that non SG
247DVMA masters would do SG? It'd be very helpful for RAID.]
248
249 In order to perform a consistent DVMA a driver does something
250like the following:
251
252 char *mem; /* Address in the CPU space */
253 u32 busa; /* Address in the SBus space */
254
255 mem = (char *) sbus_alloc_consistent(sdev, MYMEMSIZE, &busa);
256
257 Then mem is used when CPU accesses this memory and u32
258is fed to the device so that it can do DVMA. This is typically
259done with an sbus_writel() into some device register.
260
261 Do not forget to free the DVMA resources once you are done:
262
263 sbus_free_consistent(sdev, MYMEMSIZE, mem, busa);
264
265 Streaming DVMA is more interesting. First you allocate some
266memory suitable for it or pin down some user pages. Then it all works
267like this:
268
269 char *mem = argumen1;
270 unsigned int size = argument2;
271 u32 busa; /* Address in the SBus space */
272
273 *mem = 1; /* CPU can access */
274 busa = sbus_map_single(sdev, mem, size);
275 if (busa == 0) .......
276
277 /* Tell the device to use busa here */
278 /* CPU cannot access the memory without sbus_dma_sync_single() */
279
280 sbus_unmap_single(sdev, busa, size);
281 if (*mem == 0) .... /* CPU can access again */
282
283 It is possible to retain mappings and ask the device to
284access data again and again without calling sbus_unmap_single.
285However, CPU caches must be invalidated with sbus_dma_sync_single
286before such access.
287
288[TBD but what about writeback caches here... do we have any?]
289
290 There is an equivalent set of functions doing the same thing
291only with several memory segments at once for devices capable of
292scatter-gather transfers. Use the Source, Luke.
293
294 Examples
295
296 drivers/net/sunhme.c
297 This is a complicated driver which illustrates many concepts
298discussed above and plus it handles both PCI and SBUS boards.
299
300 drivers/scsi/esp.c
301 Check it out for scatter-gather DVMA.
302
303 drivers/sbus/char/bpp.c
304 A non-DVMA device.
305
306 drivers/net/sunlance.c
307 Lance driver abuses consistent mappings for data transfer.
308It is a nifty trick which we do not particularly recommend...
309Just check it out and know that it's legal.
diff --git a/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx b/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx
index bbe8dee681a5..6bb916d57c95 100644
--- a/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx
+++ b/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx
@@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Each slave device attached to the PXA must provide slave specific configuration
96information via the structure "pxa2xx_spi_chip" found in 96information via the structure "pxa2xx_spi_chip" found in
97"arch/arm/mach-pxa/include/mach/pxa2xx_spi.h". The pxa2xx_spi master controller driver 97"arch/arm/mach-pxa/include/mach/pxa2xx_spi.h". The pxa2xx_spi master controller driver
98will uses the configuration whenever the driver communicates with the slave 98will uses the configuration whenever the driver communicates with the slave
99device. 99device. All fields are optional.
100 100
101struct pxa2xx_spi_chip { 101struct pxa2xx_spi_chip {
102 u8 tx_threshold; 102 u8 tx_threshold;
@@ -112,14 +112,17 @@ used to configure the SSP hardware fifo. These fields are critical to the
112performance of pxa2xx_spi driver and misconfiguration will result in rx 112performance of pxa2xx_spi driver and misconfiguration will result in rx
113fifo overruns (especially in PIO mode transfers). Good default values are 113fifo overruns (especially in PIO mode transfers). Good default values are
114 114
115 .tx_threshold = 12, 115 .tx_threshold = 8,
116 .rx_threshold = 4, 116 .rx_threshold = 8,
117
118The range is 1 to 16 where zero indicates "use default".
117 119
118The "pxa2xx_spi_chip.dma_burst_size" field is used to configure PXA2xx DMA 120The "pxa2xx_spi_chip.dma_burst_size" field is used to configure PXA2xx DMA
119engine and is related the "spi_device.bits_per_word" field. Read and understand 121engine and is related the "spi_device.bits_per_word" field. Read and understand
120the PXA2xx "Developer Manual" sections on the DMA controller and SSP Controllers 122the PXA2xx "Developer Manual" sections on the DMA controller and SSP Controllers
121to determine the correct value. An SSP configured for byte-wide transfers would 123to determine the correct value. An SSP configured for byte-wide transfers would
122use a value of 8. 124use a value of 8. The driver will determine a reasonable default if
125dma_burst_size == 0.
123 126
124The "pxa2xx_spi_chip.timeout" fields is used to efficiently handle 127The "pxa2xx_spi_chip.timeout" fields is used to efficiently handle
125trailing bytes in the SSP receiver fifo. The correct value for this field is 128trailing bytes in the SSP receiver fifo. The correct value for this field is
@@ -137,7 +140,13 @@ function for asserting/deasserting a slave device chip select. If the field is
137NULL, the pxa2xx_spi master controller driver assumes that the SSP port is 140NULL, the pxa2xx_spi master controller driver assumes that the SSP port is
138configured to use SSPFRM instead. 141configured to use SSPFRM instead.
139 142
140NSSP SALVE SAMPLE 143NOTE: the SPI driver cannot control the chip select if SSPFRM is used, so the
144chipselect is dropped after each spi_transfer. Most devices need chip select
145asserted around the complete message. Use SSPFRM as a GPIO (through cs_control)
146to accomodate these chips.
147
148
149NSSP SLAVE SAMPLE
141----------------- 150-----------------
142The pxa2xx_spi_chip structure is passed to the pxa2xx_spi driver in the 151The pxa2xx_spi_chip structure is passed to the pxa2xx_spi driver in the
143"spi_board_info.controller_data" field. Below is a sample configuration using 152"spi_board_info.controller_data" field. Below is a sample configuration using
@@ -206,18 +215,21 @@ static void __init streetracer_init(void)
206 215
207DMA and PIO I/O Support 216DMA and PIO I/O Support
208----------------------- 217-----------------------
209The pxa2xx_spi driver support both DMA and interrupt driven PIO message 218The pxa2xx_spi driver supports both DMA and interrupt driven PIO message
210transfers. The driver defaults to PIO mode and DMA transfers must enabled by 219transfers. The driver defaults to PIO mode and DMA transfers must be enabled
211setting the "enable_dma" flag in the "pxa2xx_spi_master" structure and 220by setting the "enable_dma" flag in the "pxa2xx_spi_master" structure. The DMA
212ensuring that the "pxa2xx_spi_chip.dma_burst_size" field is non-zero. The DMA 221mode supports both coherent and stream based DMA mappings.
213mode support both coherent and stream based DMA mappings.
214 222
215The following logic is used to determine the type of I/O to be used on 223The following logic is used to determine the type of I/O to be used on
216a per "spi_transfer" basis: 224a per "spi_transfer" basis:
217 225
218if !enable_dma or dma_burst_size == 0 then 226if !enable_dma then
219 always use PIO transfers 227 always use PIO transfers
220 228
229if spi_message.len > 8191 then
230 print "rate limited" warning
231 use PIO transfers
232
221if spi_message.is_dma_mapped and rx_dma_buf != 0 and tx_dma_buf != 0 then 233if spi_message.is_dma_mapped and rx_dma_buf != 0 and tx_dma_buf != 0 then
222 use coherent DMA mode 234 use coherent DMA mode
223 235
diff --git a/Documentation/timers/00-INDEX b/Documentation/timers/00-INDEX
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..397dc35e1323
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/timers/00-INDEX
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
100-INDEX
2 - this file
3highres.txt
4 - High resolution timers and dynamic ticks design notes
5hpet.txt
6 - High Precision Event Timer Driver for Linux
7hrtimers.txt
8 - subsystem for high-resolution kernel timers
9timer_stats.txt
10 - timer usage statistics
diff --git a/Documentation/hpet.txt b/Documentation/timers/hpet.txt
index 6ad52d9dad6c..e7c09abcfab4 100644
--- a/Documentation/hpet.txt
+++ b/Documentation/timers/hpet.txt
@@ -1,21 +1,32 @@
1 High Precision Event Timer Driver for Linux 1 High Precision Event Timer Driver for Linux
2 2
3The High Precision Event Timer (HPET) hardware is the future replacement 3The High Precision Event Timer (HPET) hardware follows a specification
4for the 8254 and Real Time Clock (RTC) periodic timer functionality. 4by Intel and Microsoft which can be found at
5Each HPET can have up to 32 timers. It is possible to configure the 5
6first two timers as legacy replacements for 8254 and RTC periodic timers. 6 http://www.intel.com/technology/architecture/hpetspec.htm
7A specification done by Intel and Microsoft can be found at 7
8<http://www.intel.com/technology/architecture/hpetspec.htm>. 8Each HPET has one fixed-rate counter (at 10+ MHz, hence "High Precision")
9and up to 32 comparators. Normally three or more comparators are provided,
10each of which can generate oneshot interupts and at least one of which has
11additional hardware to support periodic interrupts. The comparators are
12also called "timers", which can be misleading since usually timers are
13independent of each other ... these share a counter, complicating resets.
14
15HPET devices can support two interrupt routing modes. In one mode, the
16comparators are additional interrupt sources with no particular system
17role. Many x86 BIOS writers don't route HPET interrupts at all, which
18prevents use of that mode. They support the other "legacy replacement"
19mode where the first two comparators block interrupts from 8254 timers
20and from the RTC.
9 21
10The driver supports detection of HPET driver allocation and initialization 22The driver supports detection of HPET driver allocation and initialization
11of the HPET before the driver module_init routine is called. This enables 23of the HPET before the driver module_init routine is called. This enables
12platform code which uses timer 0 or 1 as the main timer to intercept HPET 24platform code which uses timer 0 or 1 as the main timer to intercept HPET
13initialization. An example of this initialization can be found in 25initialization. An example of this initialization can be found in
14arch/i386/kernel/time_hpet.c. 26arch/x86/kernel/hpet.c.
15 27
16The driver provides two APIs which are very similar to the API found in 28The driver provides a userspace API which resembles the API found in the
17the rtc.c driver. There is a user space API and a kernel space API. 29RTC driver framework. An example user space program is provided below.
18An example user space program is provided below.
19 30
20#include <stdio.h> 31#include <stdio.h>
21#include <stdlib.h> 32#include <stdlib.h>
@@ -286,15 +297,3 @@ out:
286 297
287 return; 298 return;
288} 299}
289
290The kernel API has three interfaces exported from the driver:
291
292 hpet_register(struct hpet_task *tp, int periodic)
293 hpet_unregister(struct hpet_task *tp)
294 hpet_control(struct hpet_task *tp, unsigned int cmd, unsigned long arg)
295
296The kernel module using this interface fills in the ht_func and ht_data
297members of the hpet_task structure before calling hpet_register.
298hpet_control simply vectors to the hpet_ioctl routine and has the same
299commands and respective arguments as the user API. hpet_unregister
300is used to terminate usage of the HPET timer reserved by hpet_register.
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.bttv b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.bttv
index f32efb6fb12c..60ba66836038 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.bttv
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.bttv
@@ -150,3 +150,4 @@
150149 -> Typhoon TV-Tuner PCI (50684) 150149 -> Typhoon TV-Tuner PCI (50684)
151150 -> Geovision GV-600 [008a:763c] 151150 -> Geovision GV-600 [008a:763c]
152151 -> Kozumi KTV-01C 152151 -> Kozumi KTV-01C
153152 -> Encore ENL TV-FM-2 [1000:1801]
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885
index f0e613ba55b8..64823ccacd69 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885
@@ -9,3 +9,5 @@
9 8 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR1700 [0070:8101] 9 8 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR1700 [0070:8101]
10 9 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR1400 [0070:8010] 10 9 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR1400 [0070:8010]
11 10 -> DViCO FusionHDTV7 Dual Express [18ac:d618] 11 10 -> DViCO FusionHDTV7 Dual Express [18ac:d618]
12 11 -> DViCO FusionHDTV DVB-T Dual Express [18ac:db78]
13 12 -> Leadtek Winfast PxDVR3200 H [107d:6681]
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88
index 7cf5685d3645..a5227e308f4a 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88
@@ -66,3 +66,11 @@
66 65 -> DViCO FusionHDTV 7 Gold [18ac:d610] 66 65 -> DViCO FusionHDTV 7 Gold [18ac:d610]
67 66 -> Prolink Pixelview MPEG 8000GT [1554:4935] 67 66 -> Prolink Pixelview MPEG 8000GT [1554:4935]
68 67 -> Kworld PlusTV HD PCI 120 (ATSC 120) [17de:08c1] 68 67 -> Kworld PlusTV HD PCI 120 (ATSC 120) [17de:08c1]
69 68 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR4000 DVB-S/S2/T/Hybrid [0070:6900,0070:6904,0070:6902]
70 69 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR4000(Lite) DVB-S/S2 [0070:6905,0070:6906]
71 70 -> TeVii S460 DVB-S/S2 [d460:9022]
72 71 -> Omicom SS4 DVB-S/S2 PCI [A044:2011]
73 72 -> TBS 8920 DVB-S/S2 [8920:8888]
74 73 -> TeVii S420 DVB-S [d420:9022]
75 74 -> Prolink Pixelview Global Extreme [1554:4976]
76 75 -> PROF 7300 DVB-S/S2 [B033:3033]
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx
index 53449cb99b17..187cc48d0924 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
1 0 -> Unknown EM2800 video grabber (em2800) [eb1a:2800] 1 0 -> Unknown EM2800 video grabber (em2800) [eb1a:2800]
2 1 -> Unknown EM2750/28xx video grabber (em2820/em2840) [eb1a:2820,eb1a:2821,eb1a:2860,eb1a:2861,eb1a:2870,eb1a:2881,eb1a:2883] 2 1 -> Unknown EM2750/28xx video grabber (em2820/em2840) [eb1a:2820,eb1a:2860,eb1a:2861,eb1a:2870,eb1a:2881,eb1a:2883]
3 2 -> Terratec Cinergy 250 USB (em2820/em2840) [0ccd:0036] 3 2 -> Terratec Cinergy 250 USB (em2820/em2840) [0ccd:0036]
4 3 -> Pinnacle PCTV USB 2 (em2820/em2840) [2304:0208] 4 3 -> Pinnacle PCTV USB 2 (em2820/em2840) [2304:0208]
5 4 -> Hauppauge WinTV USB 2 (em2820/em2840) [2040:4200,2040:4201] 5 4 -> Hauppauge WinTV USB 2 (em2820/em2840) [2040:4200,2040:4201]
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
12 11 -> Terratec Hybrid XS (em2880) [0ccd:0042] 12 11 -> Terratec Hybrid XS (em2880) [0ccd:0042]
13 12 -> Kworld PVR TV 2800 RF (em2820/em2840) 13 12 -> Kworld PVR TV 2800 RF (em2820/em2840)
14 13 -> Terratec Prodigy XS (em2880) [0ccd:0047] 14 13 -> Terratec Prodigy XS (em2880) [0ccd:0047]
15 14 -> Pixelview Prolink PlayTV USB 2.0 (em2820/em2840) 15 14 -> Pixelview Prolink PlayTV USB 2.0 (em2820/em2840) [eb1a:2821]
16 15 -> V-Gear PocketTV (em2800) 16 15 -> V-Gear PocketTV (em2800)
17 16 -> Hauppauge WinTV HVR 950 (em2883) [2040:6513,2040:6517,2040:651b,2040:651f] 17 16 -> Hauppauge WinTV HVR 950 (em2883) [2040:6513,2040:6517,2040:651b,2040:651f]
18 17 -> Pinnacle PCTV HD Pro Stick (em2880) [2304:0227] 18 17 -> Pinnacle PCTV HD Pro Stick (em2880) [2304:0227]
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134
index 39868af9cf9f..dc67eef38ff9 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134
@@ -76,7 +76,7 @@
76 75 -> AVerMedia AVerTVHD MCE A180 [1461:1044] 76 75 -> AVerMedia AVerTVHD MCE A180 [1461:1044]
77 76 -> SKNet MonsterTV Mobile [1131:4ee9] 77 76 -> SKNet MonsterTV Mobile [1131:4ee9]
78 77 -> Pinnacle PCTV 40i/50i/110i (saa7133) [11bd:002e] 78 77 -> Pinnacle PCTV 40i/50i/110i (saa7133) [11bd:002e]
79 78 -> ASUSTeK P7131 Dual [1043:4862,1043:4857] 79 78 -> ASUSTeK P7131 Dual [1043:4862]
80 79 -> Sedna/MuchTV PC TV Cardbus TV/Radio (ITO25 Rev:2B) 80 79 -> Sedna/MuchTV PC TV Cardbus TV/Radio (ITO25 Rev:2B)
81 80 -> ASUS Digimatrix TV [1043:0210] 81 80 -> ASUS Digimatrix TV [1043:0210]
82 81 -> Philips Tiger reference design [1131:2018] 82 81 -> Philips Tiger reference design [1131:2018]
@@ -145,3 +145,9 @@
145144 -> Beholder BeholdTV M6 Extra [5ace:6193] 145144 -> Beholder BeholdTV M6 Extra [5ace:6193]
146145 -> AVerMedia MiniPCI DVB-T Hybrid M103 [1461:f636] 146145 -> AVerMedia MiniPCI DVB-T Hybrid M103 [1461:f636]
147146 -> ASUSTeK P7131 Analog 147146 -> ASUSTeK P7131 Analog
148147 -> Asus Tiger 3in1 [1043:4878]
149148 -> Encore ENLTV-FM v5.3 [1a7f:2008]
150149 -> Avermedia PCI pure analog (M135A) [1461:f11d]
151150 -> Zogis Real Angel 220
152151 -> ADS Tech Instant HDTV [1421:0380]
153152 -> Asus Tiger Rev:1.00 [1043:4857]
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.tuner b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.tuner
index 0e2394695bb8..30bbdda68d03 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.tuner
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.tuner
@@ -74,3 +74,4 @@ tuner=72 - Thomson FE6600
74tuner=73 - Samsung TCPG 6121P30A 74tuner=73 - Samsung TCPG 6121P30A
75tuner=75 - Philips TEA5761 FM Radio 75tuner=75 - Philips TEA5761 FM Radio
76tuner=76 - Xceive 5000 tuner 76tuner=76 - Xceive 5000 tuner
77tuner=77 - TCL tuner MF02GIP-5N-E
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt
index 9a3e4d797fa8..004818fab040 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ The modules are:
7xxxx vend:prod 7xxxx vend:prod
8---- 8----
9spca501 0000:0000 MystFromOri Unknow Camera 9spca501 0000:0000 MystFromOri Unknow Camera
10m5602 0402:5602 ALi Video Camera Controller
10spca501 040a:0002 Kodak DVC-325 11spca501 040a:0002 Kodak DVC-325
11spca500 040a:0300 Kodak EZ200 12spca500 040a:0300 Kodak EZ200
12zc3xx 041e:041e Creative WebCam Live! 13zc3xx 041e:041e Creative WebCam Live!
@@ -42,6 +43,7 @@ zc3xx 0458:7007 Genius VideoCam V2
42zc3xx 0458:700c Genius VideoCam V3 43zc3xx 0458:700c Genius VideoCam V3
43zc3xx 0458:700f Genius VideoCam Web V2 44zc3xx 0458:700f Genius VideoCam Web V2
44sonixj 0458:7025 Genius Eye 311Q 45sonixj 0458:7025 Genius Eye 311Q
46sonixj 0458:702e Genius Slim 310 NB
45sonixj 045e:00f5 MicroSoft VX3000 47sonixj 045e:00f5 MicroSoft VX3000
46sonixj 045e:00f7 MicroSoft VX1000 48sonixj 045e:00f7 MicroSoft VX1000
47ov519 045e:028c Micro$oft xbox cam 49ov519 045e:028c Micro$oft xbox cam
@@ -81,7 +83,7 @@ spca561 046d:092b Labtec Webcam Plus
81spca561 046d:092c Logitech QC chat Elch2 83spca561 046d:092c Logitech QC chat Elch2
82spca561 046d:092d Logitech QC Elch2 84spca561 046d:092d Logitech QC Elch2
83spca561 046d:092e Logitech QC Elch2 85spca561 046d:092e Logitech QC Elch2
84spca561 046d:092f Logitech QC Elch2 86spca561 046d:092f Logitech QuickCam Express Plus
85sunplus 046d:0960 Logitech ClickSmart 420 87sunplus 046d:0960 Logitech ClickSmart 420
86sunplus 0471:0322 Philips DMVC1300K 88sunplus 0471:0322 Philips DMVC1300K
87zc3xx 0471:0325 Philips SPC 200 NC 89zc3xx 0471:0325 Philips SPC 200 NC
@@ -96,6 +98,29 @@ sunplus 04a5:3003 Benq DC 1300
96sunplus 04a5:3008 Benq DC 1500 98sunplus 04a5:3008 Benq DC 1500
97sunplus 04a5:300a Benq DC 3410 99sunplus 04a5:300a Benq DC 3410
98spca500 04a5:300c Benq DC 1016 100spca500 04a5:300c Benq DC 1016
101finepix 04cb:0104 Fujifilm FinePix 4800
102finepix 04cb:0109 Fujifilm FinePix A202
103finepix 04cb:010b Fujifilm FinePix A203
104finepix 04cb:010f Fujifilm FinePix A204
105finepix 04cb:0111 Fujifilm FinePix A205
106finepix 04cb:0113 Fujifilm FinePix A210
107finepix 04cb:0115 Fujifilm FinePix A303
108finepix 04cb:0117 Fujifilm FinePix A310
109finepix 04cb:0119 Fujifilm FinePix F401
110finepix 04cb:011b Fujifilm FinePix F402
111finepix 04cb:011d Fujifilm FinePix F410
112finepix 04cb:0121 Fujifilm FinePix F601
113finepix 04cb:0123 Fujifilm FinePix F700
114finepix 04cb:0125 Fujifilm FinePix M603
115finepix 04cb:0127 Fujifilm FinePix S300
116finepix 04cb:0129 Fujifilm FinePix S304
117finepix 04cb:012b Fujifilm FinePix S500
118finepix 04cb:012d Fujifilm FinePix S602
119finepix 04cb:012f Fujifilm FinePix S700
120finepix 04cb:0131 Fujifilm FinePix unknown model
121finepix 04cb:013b Fujifilm FinePix unknown model
122finepix 04cb:013d Fujifilm FinePix unknown model
123finepix 04cb:013f Fujifilm FinePix F420
99sunplus 04f1:1001 JVC GC A50 124sunplus 04f1:1001 JVC GC A50
100spca561 04fc:0561 Flexcam 100 125spca561 04fc:0561 Flexcam 100
101sunplus 04fc:500c Sunplus CA500C 126sunplus 04fc:500c Sunplus CA500C
@@ -181,6 +206,7 @@ pac207 093a:2468 PAC207
181pac207 093a:2470 Genius GF112 206pac207 093a:2470 Genius GF112
182pac207 093a:2471 Genius VideoCam ge111 207pac207 093a:2471 Genius VideoCam ge111
183pac207 093a:2472 Genius VideoCam ge110 208pac207 093a:2472 Genius VideoCam ge110
209pac207 093a:2476 Genius e-Messenger 112
184pac7311 093a:2600 PAC7311 Typhoon 210pac7311 093a:2600 PAC7311 Typhoon
185pac7311 093a:2601 Philips SPC 610 NC 211pac7311 093a:2601 Philips SPC 610 NC
186pac7311 093a:2603 PAC7312 212pac7311 093a:2603 PAC7312
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/m5602.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/m5602.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4450ab13f37b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/m5602.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
1This document describes the ALi m5602 bridge connected
2to the following supported sensors:
3OmniVision OV9650,
4Samsung s5k83a,
5Samsung s5k4aa,
6Micron mt9m111,
7Pixel plus PO1030
8
9This driver mimics the windows drivers, which have a braindead implementation sending bayer-encoded frames at VGA resolution.
10In a perfect world we should be able to reprogram the m5602 and the connected sensor in hardware instead, supporting a range of resolutions and pixelformats
11
12Anyway, have fun and please report any bugs to m560x-driver-devel@lists.sourceforge.net
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/soc-camera.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/soc-camera.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..178ef3c5e579
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/soc-camera.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,120 @@
1 Soc-Camera Subsystem
2 ====================
3
4Terminology
5-----------
6
7The following terms are used in this document:
8 - camera / camera device / camera sensor - a video-camera sensor chip, capable
9 of connecting to a variety of systems and interfaces, typically uses i2c for
10 control and configuration, and a parallel or a serial bus for data.
11 - camera host - an interface, to which a camera is connected. Typically a
12 specialised interface, present on many SoCs, e.g., PXA27x and PXA3xx, SuperH,
13 AVR32, i.MX27, i.MX31.
14 - camera host bus - a connection between a camera host and a camera. Can be
15 parallel or serial, consists of data and control lines, e.g., clock, vertical
16 and horizontal synchronization signals.
17
18Purpose of the soc-camera subsystem
19-----------------------------------
20
21The soc-camera subsystem provides a unified API between camera host drivers and
22camera sensor drivers. It implements a V4L2 interface to the user, currently
23only the mmap method is supported.
24
25This subsystem has been written to connect drivers for System-on-Chip (SoC)
26video capture interfaces with drivers for CMOS camera sensor chips to enable
27the reuse of sensor drivers with various hosts. The subsystem has been designed
28to support multiple camera host interfaces and multiple cameras per interface,
29although most applications have only one camera sensor.
30
31Existing drivers
32----------------
33
34As of 2.6.27-rc4 there are two host drivers in the mainline: pxa_camera.c for
35PXA27x SoCs and sh_mobile_ceu_camera.c for SuperH SoCs, and four sensor drivers:
36mt9m001.c, mt9m111.c, mt9v022.c and a generic soc_camera_platform.c driver. This
37list is not supposed to be updated, look for more examples in your tree.
38
39Camera host API
40---------------
41
42A host camera driver is registered using the
43
44soc_camera_host_register(struct soc_camera_host *);
45
46function. The host object can be initialized as follows:
47
48static struct soc_camera_host pxa_soc_camera_host = {
49 .drv_name = PXA_CAM_DRV_NAME,
50 .ops = &pxa_soc_camera_host_ops,
51};
52
53All camera host methods are passed in a struct soc_camera_host_ops:
54
55static struct soc_camera_host_ops pxa_soc_camera_host_ops = {
56 .owner = THIS_MODULE,
57 .add = pxa_camera_add_device,
58 .remove = pxa_camera_remove_device,
59 .suspend = pxa_camera_suspend,
60 .resume = pxa_camera_resume,
61 .set_fmt_cap = pxa_camera_set_fmt_cap,
62 .try_fmt_cap = pxa_camera_try_fmt_cap,
63 .init_videobuf = pxa_camera_init_videobuf,
64 .reqbufs = pxa_camera_reqbufs,
65 .poll = pxa_camera_poll,
66 .querycap = pxa_camera_querycap,
67 .try_bus_param = pxa_camera_try_bus_param,
68 .set_bus_param = pxa_camera_set_bus_param,
69};
70
71.add and .remove methods are called when a sensor is attached to or detached
72from the host, apart from performing host-internal tasks they shall also call
73sensor driver's .init and .release methods respectively. .suspend and .resume
74methods implement host's power-management functionality and its their
75responsibility to call respective sensor's methods. .try_bus_param and
76.set_bus_param are used to negotiate physical connection parameters between the
77host and the sensor. .init_videobuf is called by soc-camera core when a
78video-device is opened, further video-buffer management is implemented completely
79by the specific camera host driver. The rest of the methods are called from
80respective V4L2 operations.
81
82Camera API
83----------
84
85Sensor drivers can use struct soc_camera_link, typically provided by the
86platform, and used to specify to which camera host bus the sensor is connected,
87and arbitrarily provide platform .power and .reset methods for the camera.
88soc_camera_device_register() and soc_camera_device_unregister() functions are
89used to add a sensor driver to or remove one from the system. The registration
90function takes a pointer to struct soc_camera_device as the only parameter.
91This struct can be initialized as follows:
92
93 /* link to driver operations */
94 icd->ops = &mt9m001_ops;
95 /* link to the underlying physical (e.g., i2c) device */
96 icd->control = &client->dev;
97 /* window geometry */
98 icd->x_min = 20;
99 icd->y_min = 12;
100 icd->x_current = 20;
101 icd->y_current = 12;
102 icd->width_min = 48;
103 icd->width_max = 1280;
104 icd->height_min = 32;
105 icd->height_max = 1024;
106 icd->y_skip_top = 1;
107 /* camera bus ID, typically obtained from platform data */
108 icd->iface = icl->bus_id;
109
110struct soc_camera_ops provides .probe and .remove methods, which are called by
111the soc-camera core, when a camera is matched against or removed from a camera
112host bus, .init, .release, .suspend, and .resume are called from the camera host
113driver as discussed above. Other members of this struct provide respective V4L2
114functionality.
115
116struct soc_camera_device also links to an array of struct soc_camera_data_format,
117listing pixel formats, supported by the camera.
118
119--
120Author: Guennadi Liakhovetski <g.liakhovetski@gmx.de>
diff --git a/Documentation/w1/00-INDEX b/Documentation/w1/00-INDEX
index 5270cf4cb109..cb49802745dc 100644
--- a/Documentation/w1/00-INDEX
+++ b/Documentation/w1/00-INDEX
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
100-INDEX 100-INDEX
2 - This file 2 - This file
3slaves/
4 - Drivers that provide support for specific family codes.
3masters/ 5masters/
4 - Individual chips providing 1-wire busses. 6 - Individual chips providing 1-wire busses.
5w1.generic 7w1.generic
diff --git a/Documentation/w1/masters/ds2490 b/Documentation/w1/masters/ds2490
index 239f9ae01843..28176def3d6f 100644
--- a/Documentation/w1/masters/ds2490
+++ b/Documentation/w1/masters/ds2490
@@ -16,3 +16,55 @@ which allows to build USB <-> W1 bridges.
16DS9490(R) is a USB <-> W1 bus master device 16DS9490(R) is a USB <-> W1 bus master device
17which has 0x81 family ID integrated chip and DS2490 17which has 0x81 family ID integrated chip and DS2490
18low-level operational chip. 18low-level operational chip.
19
20Notes and limitations.
21- The weak pullup current is a minimum of 0.9mA and maximum of 6.0mA.
22- The 5V strong pullup is supported with a minimum of 5.9mA and a
23 maximum of 30.4 mA. (From DS2490.pdf)
24- While the ds2490 supports a hardware search the code doesn't take
25 advantage of it (in tested case it only returned first device).
26- The hardware will detect when devices are attached to the bus on the
27 next bus (reset?) operation, however only a message is printed as
28 the core w1 code doesn't make use of the information. Connecting
29 one device tends to give multiple new device notifications.
30- The number of USB bus transactions could be reduced if w1_reset_send
31 was added to the API. The name is just a suggestion. It would take
32 a write buffer and a read buffer (along with sizes) as arguments.
33 The ds2490 block I/O command supports reset, write buffer, read
34 buffer, and strong pullup all in one command, instead of the current
35 1 reset bus, 2 write the match rom command and slave rom id, 3 block
36 write and read data. The write buffer needs to have the match rom
37 command and slave rom id prepended to the front of the requested
38 write buffer, both of which are known to the driver.
39- The hardware supports normal, flexible, and overdrive bus
40 communication speeds, but only the normal is supported.
41- The registered w1_bus_master functions don't define error
42 conditions. If a bus search is in progress and the ds2490 is
43 removed it can produce a good amount of error output before the bus
44 search finishes.
45- The hardware supports detecting some error conditions, such as
46 short, alarming presence on reset, and no presence on reset, but the
47 driver doesn't query those values.
48- The ds2490 specification doesn't cover short bulk in reads in
49 detail, but my observation is if fewer bytes are requested than are
50 available, the bulk read will return an error and the hardware will
51 clear the entire bulk in buffer. It would be possible to read the
52 maximum buffer size to not run into this error condition, only extra
53 bytes in the buffer is a logic error in the driver. The code should
54 should match reads and writes as well as data sizes. Reads and
55 writes are serialized and the status verifies that the chip is idle
56 (and data is available) before the read is executed, so it should
57 not happen.
58- Running x86_64 2.6.24 UHCI under qemu 0.9.0 under x86_64 2.6.22-rc6
59 with a OHCI controller, ds2490 running in the guest would operate
60 normally the first time the module was loaded after qemu attached
61 the ds2490 hardware, but if the module was unloaded, then reloaded
62 most of the time one of the bulk out or in, and usually the bulk in
63 would fail. qemu sets a 50ms timeout and the bulk in would timeout
64 even when the status shows data available. A bulk out write would
65 show a successful completion, but the ds2490 status register would
66 show 0 bytes written. Detaching qemu from the ds2490 hardware and
67 reattaching would clear the problem. usbmon output in the guest and
68 host did not explain the problem. My guess is a bug in either qemu
69 or the host OS and more likely the host OS.
70-- 03-06-2008 David Fries <David@Fries.net>
diff --git a/Documentation/w1/slaves/00-INDEX b/Documentation/w1/slaves/00-INDEX
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f8101d6b07b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/w1/slaves/00-INDEX
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
100-INDEX
2 - This file
3w1_therm
4 - The Maxim/Dallas Semiconductor ds18*20 temperature sensor.
diff --git a/Documentation/w1/slaves/w1_therm b/Documentation/w1/slaves/w1_therm
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0403aaaba878
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/w1/slaves/w1_therm
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
1Kernel driver w1_therm
2====================
3
4Supported chips:
5 * Maxim ds18*20 based temperature sensors.
6
7Author: Evgeniy Polyakov <johnpol@2ka.mipt.ru>
8
9
10Description
11-----------
12
13w1_therm provides basic temperature conversion for ds18*20 devices.
14supported family codes:
15W1_THERM_DS18S20 0x10
16W1_THERM_DS1822 0x22
17W1_THERM_DS18B20 0x28
18
19Support is provided through the sysfs w1_slave file. Each open and
20read sequence will initiate a temperature conversion then provide two
21lines of ASCII output. The first line contains the nine hex bytes
22read along with a calculated crc value and YES or NO if it matched.
23If the crc matched the returned values are retained. The second line
24displays the retained values along with a temperature in millidegrees
25Centigrade after t=.
26
27Parasite powered devices are limited to one slave performing a
28temperature conversion at a time. If none of the devices are parasite
29powered it would be possible to convert all the devices at the same
30time and then go back to read individual sensors. That isn't
31currently supported. The driver also doesn't support reduced
32precision (which would also reduce the conversion time).
33
34The module parameter strong_pullup can be set to 0 to disable the
35strong pullup or 1 to enable. If enabled the 5V strong pullup will be
36enabled when the conversion is taking place provided the master driver
37must support the strong pullup (or it falls back to a pullup
38resistor). The DS18b20 temperature sensor specification lists a
39maximum current draw of 1.5mA and that a 5k pullup resistor is not
40sufficient. The strong pullup is designed to provide the additional
41current required.
diff --git a/Documentation/w1/w1.generic b/Documentation/w1/w1.generic
index 4c6509dd4789..e3333eec4320 100644
--- a/Documentation/w1/w1.generic
+++ b/Documentation/w1/w1.generic
@@ -79,10 +79,13 @@ w1 master sysfs interface
79<xx-xxxxxxxxxxxxx> - a directory for a found device. The format is family-serial 79<xx-xxxxxxxxxxxxx> - a directory for a found device. The format is family-serial
80bus - (standard) symlink to the w1 bus 80bus - (standard) symlink to the w1 bus
81driver - (standard) symlink to the w1 driver 81driver - (standard) symlink to the w1 driver
82w1_master_add - Manually register a slave device
82w1_master_attempts - the number of times a search was attempted 83w1_master_attempts - the number of times a search was attempted
83w1_master_max_slave_count 84w1_master_max_slave_count
84 - the maximum slaves that may be attached to a master 85 - the maximum slaves that may be attached to a master
85w1_master_name - the name of the device (w1_bus_masterX) 86w1_master_name - the name of the device (w1_bus_masterX)
87w1_master_pullup - 5V strong pullup 0 enabled, 1 disabled
88w1_master_remove - Manually remove a slave device
86w1_master_search - the number of searches left to do, -1=continual (default) 89w1_master_search - the number of searches left to do, -1=continual (default)
87w1_master_slave_count 90w1_master_slave_count
88 - the number of slaves found 91 - the number of slaves found
@@ -90,7 +93,13 @@ w1_master_slaves - the names of the slaves, one per line
90w1_master_timeout - the delay in seconds between searches 93w1_master_timeout - the delay in seconds between searches
91 94
92If you have a w1 bus that never changes (you don't add or remove devices), 95If you have a w1 bus that never changes (you don't add or remove devices),
93you can set w1_master_search to a positive value to disable searches. 96you can set the module parameter search_count to a small positive number
97for an initially small number of bus searches. Alternatively it could be
98set to zero, then manually add the slave device serial numbers by
99w1_master_add device file. The w1_master_add and w1_master_remove files
100generally only make sense when searching is disabled, as a search will
101redetect manually removed devices that are present and timeout manually
102added devices that aren't on the bus.
94 103
95 104
96w1 slave sysfs interface 105w1 slave sysfs interface
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/00-INDEX b/Documentation/x86/00-INDEX
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..dbe3377754af
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/x86/00-INDEX
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
100-INDEX
2 - this file
3mtrr.txt
4 - how to use x86 Memory Type Range Registers to increase performance
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/i386/boot.txt b/Documentation/x86/boot.txt
index 147bfe511cdd..83c0033ee9e0 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/i386/boot.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/boot.txt
@@ -308,7 +308,7 @@ Protocol: 2.00+
308 308
309Field name: start_sys 309Field name: start_sys
310Type: read 310Type: read
311Offset/size: 0x20c/4 311Offset/size: 0x20c/2
312Protocol: 2.00+ 312Protocol: 2.00+
313 313
314 The load low segment (0x1000). Obsolete. 314 The load low segment (0x1000). Obsolete.
diff --git a/Documentation/mtrr.txt b/Documentation/x86/mtrr.txt
index c39ac395970e..cc071dc333c2 100644
--- a/Documentation/mtrr.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/mtrr.txt
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ Richard Gooch
18 The AMD K6-2 (stepping 8 and above) and K6-3 processors have two 18 The AMD K6-2 (stepping 8 and above) and K6-3 processors have two
19 MTRRs. These are supported. The AMD Athlon family provide 8 Intel 19 MTRRs. These are supported. The AMD Athlon family provide 8 Intel
20 style MTRRs. 20 style MTRRs.
21 21
22 The Centaur C6 (WinChip) has 8 MCRs, allowing write-combining. These 22 The Centaur C6 (WinChip) has 8 MCRs, allowing write-combining. These
23 are supported. 23 are supported.
24 24
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ reg00: base=0x00000000 ( 0MB), size= 64MB: write-back, count=1
87reg01: base=0xfb000000 (4016MB), size= 16MB: write-combining, count=1 87reg01: base=0xfb000000 (4016MB), size= 16MB: write-combining, count=1
88reg02: base=0xfb000000 (4016MB), size= 4kB: uncachable, count=1 88reg02: base=0xfb000000 (4016MB), size= 4kB: uncachable, count=1
89 89
90Some cards (especially Voodoo Graphics boards) need this 4 kB area 90Some cards (especially Voodoo Graphics boards) need this 4 kB area
91excluded from the beginning of the region because it is used for 91excluded from the beginning of the region because it is used for
92registers. 92registers.
93 93
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/pat.txt b/Documentation/x86/pat.txt
index 17965f927c15..c93ff5f4c0dd 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/pat.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/pat.txt
@@ -14,6 +14,10 @@ PAT allows for different types of memory attributes. The most commonly used
14ones that will be supported at this time are Write-back, Uncached, 14ones that will be supported at this time are Write-back, Uncached,
15Write-combined and Uncached Minus. 15Write-combined and Uncached Minus.
16 16
17
18PAT APIs
19--------
20
17There are many different APIs in the kernel that allows setting of memory 21There are many different APIs in the kernel that allows setting of memory
18attributes at the page level. In order to avoid aliasing, these interfaces 22attributes at the page level. In order to avoid aliasing, these interfaces
19should be used thoughtfully. Below is a table of interfaces available, 23should be used thoughtfully. Below is a table of interfaces available,
@@ -26,38 +30,38 @@ address range to avoid any aliasing.
26API | RAM | ACPI,... | Reserved/Holes | 30API | RAM | ACPI,... | Reserved/Holes |
27-----------------------|----------|------------|------------------| 31-----------------------|----------|------------|------------------|
28 | | | | 32 | | | |
29ioremap | -- | UC | UC | 33ioremap | -- | UC- | UC- |
30 | | | | 34 | | | |
31ioremap_cache | -- | WB | WB | 35ioremap_cache | -- | WB | WB |
32 | | | | 36 | | | |
33ioremap_nocache | -- | UC | UC | 37ioremap_nocache | -- | UC- | UC- |
34 | | | | 38 | | | |
35ioremap_wc | -- | -- | WC | 39ioremap_wc | -- | -- | WC |
36 | | | | 40 | | | |
37set_memory_uc | UC | -- | -- | 41set_memory_uc | UC- | -- | -- |
38 set_memory_wb | | | | 42 set_memory_wb | | | |
39 | | | | 43 | | | |
40set_memory_wc | WC | -- | -- | 44set_memory_wc | WC | -- | -- |
41 set_memory_wb | | | | 45 set_memory_wb | | | |
42 | | | | 46 | | | |
43pci sysfs resource | -- | -- | UC | 47pci sysfs resource | -- | -- | UC- |
44 | | | | 48 | | | |
45pci sysfs resource_wc | -- | -- | WC | 49pci sysfs resource_wc | -- | -- | WC |
46 is IORESOURCE_PREFETCH| | | | 50 is IORESOURCE_PREFETCH| | | |
47 | | | | 51 | | | |
48pci proc | -- | -- | UC | 52pci proc | -- | -- | UC- |
49 !PCIIOC_WRITE_COMBINE | | | | 53 !PCIIOC_WRITE_COMBINE | | | |
50 | | | | 54 | | | |
51pci proc | -- | -- | WC | 55pci proc | -- | -- | WC |
52 PCIIOC_WRITE_COMBINE | | | | 56 PCIIOC_WRITE_COMBINE | | | |
53 | | | | 57 | | | |
54/dev/mem | -- | UC | UC | 58/dev/mem | -- | WB/WC/UC- | WB/WC/UC- |
55 read-write | | | | 59 read-write | | | |
56 | | | | 60 | | | |
57/dev/mem | -- | UC | UC | 61/dev/mem | -- | UC- | UC- |
58 mmap SYNC flag | | | | 62 mmap SYNC flag | | | |
59 | | | | 63 | | | |
60/dev/mem | -- | WB/WC/UC | WB/WC/UC | 64/dev/mem | -- | WB/WC/UC- | WB/WC/UC- |
61 mmap !SYNC flag | |(from exist-| (from exist- | 65 mmap !SYNC flag | |(from exist-| (from exist- |
62 and | | ing alias)| ing alias) | 66 and | | ing alias)| ing alias) |
63 any alias to this area| | | | 67 any alias to this area| | | |
@@ -68,7 +72,7 @@ pci proc | -- | -- | WC |
68 and | | | | 72 and | | | |
69 MTRR says WB | | | | 73 MTRR says WB | | | |
70 | | | | 74 | | | |
71/dev/mem | -- | -- | UC_MINUS | 75/dev/mem | -- | -- | UC- |
72 mmap !SYNC flag | | | | 76 mmap !SYNC flag | | | |
73 no alias to this area | | | | 77 no alias to this area | | | |
74 and | | | | 78 and | | | |
@@ -98,3 +102,35 @@ types.
98 102
99Drivers should use set_memory_[uc|wc] to set access type for RAM ranges. 103Drivers should use set_memory_[uc|wc] to set access type for RAM ranges.
100 104
105
106PAT debugging
107-------------
108
109With CONFIG_DEBUG_FS enabled, PAT memtype list can be examined by
110
111# mount -t debugfs debugfs /sys/kernel/debug
112# cat /sys/kernel/debug/x86/pat_memtype_list
113PAT memtype list:
114uncached-minus @ 0x7fadf000-0x7fae0000
115uncached-minus @ 0x7fb19000-0x7fb1a000
116uncached-minus @ 0x7fb1a000-0x7fb1b000
117uncached-minus @ 0x7fb1b000-0x7fb1c000
118uncached-minus @ 0x7fb1c000-0x7fb1d000
119uncached-minus @ 0x7fb1d000-0x7fb1e000
120uncached-minus @ 0x7fb1e000-0x7fb25000
121uncached-minus @ 0x7fb25000-0x7fb26000
122uncached-minus @ 0x7fb26000-0x7fb27000
123uncached-minus @ 0x7fb27000-0x7fb28000
124uncached-minus @ 0x7fb28000-0x7fb2e000
125uncached-minus @ 0x7fb2e000-0x7fb2f000
126uncached-minus @ 0x7fb2f000-0x7fb30000
127uncached-minus @ 0x7fb31000-0x7fb32000
128uncached-minus @ 0x80000000-0x90000000
129
130This list shows physical address ranges and various PAT settings used to
131access those physical address ranges.
132
133Another, more verbose way of getting PAT related debug messages is with
134"debugpat" boot parameter. With this parameter, various debug messages are
135printed to dmesg log.
136
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/i386/usb-legacy-support.txt b/Documentation/x86/usb-legacy-support.txt
index 1894cdfc69d9..1894cdfc69d9 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/i386/usb-legacy-support.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/usb-legacy-support.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt
index b0c7b6c4abda..72ffb5373ec7 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt
@@ -54,10 +54,6 @@ APICs
54 apicmaintimer. Useful when your PIT timer is totally 54 apicmaintimer. Useful when your PIT timer is totally
55 broken. 55 broken.
56 56
57 disable_8254_timer / enable_8254_timer
58 Enable interrupt 0 timer routing over the 8254 in addition to over
59 the IO-APIC. The kernel tries to set a sensible default.
60
61Early Console 57Early Console
62 58
63 syntax: earlyprintk=vga 59 syntax: earlyprintk=vga
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/i386/zero-page.txt b/Documentation/x86/zero-page.txt
index 169ad423a3d1..169ad423a3d1 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/i386/zero-page.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/zero-page.txt